AutoCAD LT 2012 Command Reference February 2011
© 2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Tuning Dialog Box . Performance Tuner Log . . . . . . -3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box . . . . Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box . . . Archive - Set Password Dialog Box . . -ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - A R R AY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARRAYCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARRAYEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab . ARRAYPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 BAUTHORPALETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 BCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 BCONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 BCYCLEORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4 C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Understand Syntax of Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Format Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Format Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Use Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Use System Variables in Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTENTEXPLORERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYTOLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy To Layer Dialog Box . . . .
-DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNBIND (-DGNBIND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNEXPORT Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 -DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 DLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORTDWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save as DWF Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export to DWF/PDF Options Palette . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Override Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRADIENT . . GRAPHSCR . . GRID . . . . . GROUP . . . . -GROUP GROUPEDIT . Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 . 539 . 540 . 541 . 542 . 543 H Commands . . . . . . .
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Image Dialog Box . . . Image Ribbon Contextual tab . IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . -INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERTOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11 . . . . . .
LAYLCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Change to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 -LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 LAYMCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 LAYMRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Merge Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 MEASUREGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 MLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 15 O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Scales to Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-OVERKILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898 Chapter 16 P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 -PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 QKUNGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043 QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043 Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVERSE . . . . RIBBON . . . . . RIBBONCLOSE . ROTATE . . . . . RSCRIPT . . . . . Chapter 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 . 1088 . 1088 . 1089 . 1090 S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 SAVE . . . . . .
Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141 Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143 Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Sheet Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 New Sheet Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 Create New Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213 New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 Create New Cell Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Manage Cell Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 Table Cell Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 ULAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 Underlay Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 UNGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 WMFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 WMFOPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 WMF In Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 WMFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 27 3D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 3DSELECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 Chapter 28 A System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 ADCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BPARAMETERCOLOR . . BPARAMETERFONT . . . BPARAMETERSIZE . . . BPTEXTHORIZONTAL . BTMARKDISPLAY . . . . BVMODE . . . . . . . . Chapter 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 . 1401 . 1402 . 1402 . 1403 . 1403 C System Variables . . . . . .
CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 Chapter 31 D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 DATALINKNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428 DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428 DBMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 DIMEXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 DIMEXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 DIMFRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 DIMFXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . . DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . . DIMTXTDIRECTION . . . . DIMTZIN . . . . . . . . . . DIMUPT . . . . . . . . . . . DIMZIN . . . . . . . . . . . DISPSILH . . . . . . . . . . DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . DONUTID . . . . . . . . . . DONUTOD . . . . . . . . . DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . DRAGP1 . . . . . . . . . . . DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . . DRAWORDERCTL . . . . . DRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . DWFFRAME . . . . . . . . . DWFOSNAP . . . . . . . . . DWGCHECK . . . . . .
EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Chapter 33 F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 FACETRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 FIELDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROUPDISPLAYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Chapter 35 H System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531 HALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . HELPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . . HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . . HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . HPBOUNDRETAIN . . . . .
INSNAME . . . . . . . . . INSUNITS . . . . . . . . . INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . . INSUNITSDEFTARGET . . INTELLIGENTUPDATE . . INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . Chapter 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUREINIT . . . . . . MEASUREMENT . . . . . MENUBAR . . . . . . . . MENUECHO . . . . . . . MIRRHATCH . . . . . . . MIRRTEXT . . . . . . . . MLEADERSCALE . . . . . MODEMACRO . . . . . . MSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . MSMSTATE . . . . . . . . MSOLESCALE . . . . . . . MTEXTCOLUMN . . . . . MTEXTED . . . . . . . . . MTEXTFIXED . . . . . . . MTEXTTOOLBAR . . . . . MTJIGSTRING . . . . . . MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX . Chapter 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 PDSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 PEDITACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 PELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 PERIMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QPLOCATION . . QPMODE . . . . . QTEXTMODE . . . QVDRAWINGPIN . QVLAYOUTPIN . . Chapter 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631 . 1632 . 1633 . 1633 . 1634 R System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635 RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . .
SHORTCUTMENU . . . . . . . . . . . SHORTCUTMENUDURATION . . . . . SHOWLAYERUSAGE . . . . . . . . . . SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS . SIGWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKETCHINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKTOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPISOPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNAPTYPE . . . . . . .
TEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT . TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . . TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . TOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY . . TPSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACEWID . . . . . . . . . . TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . . TRAYICONS . . . . . .
USERI1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 USERNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 USERR1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 Chapter 47 V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 50 Z System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 ZOOMFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 ZOOMWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 Chapter 51 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box . Search Folders Dialog Box . . . . . . SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■ Click the command name on a ribbon, menu, toolbar, status bar, tool palette, or shortcut menu. ■ Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press Enter or Spacebar. The acadlt.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acadlt.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Program Parameters (acadlt.pgp).
2
3D Commands 1 3DCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Performance Tuning Sets hardware acceleration on or off and provides a method to check for driver updates Summary Displays the Performance Tuning dialog box on page 3. If you enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Summary This dialog box can also be accessed from the Performance Settings button on the System tab of the Options dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Hardware and Performance Tuning Specifies hardware settings and performance tuning. The performance tuner reads your system and decides whether to use software or hardware acceleration for features that support both. Features that work with your system are turned on, and features that cannot work with your system are turned off.
Remind Me When a New Driver Is Available Specifies that a notification bubble is displayed when a new driver is available. Performance Tuner Log Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Performance Lists the features that have been disabled, if any. Summary Information includes the system configuration, 3D graphics device, driver, and if any features have been disabled. If your 3D device shows as certified, Autodesk tested AutoCAD LT with this specific hardware.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Save Log As Displays a standard file selection dialog box. -3DCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Performance Tuning Controls Hardware Acceleration from the command line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option:[acceLeration on page 6/eXit] : Acceleration Specifies whether to use software or hardware acceleration. Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 3D Polyline. Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline Summary A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include arc segments. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines.
A Commands 2 ABOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing Displays information about AutoCAD LT. Access Methods Menu: Help ➤ About Command entry: 'about for transparent use Summary Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file.
ADCCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of DesignCenter Closes DesignCenter. Summary ™ Closes the DesignCenter window. ADCENTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of DesignCenter Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ DesignCenter Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Summary The DesignCenter is displayed.
DesignCenter Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the DesignCenter Window Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs). Summary Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options.
■ Tree view (left pane) on page 14 NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility. List of Options The following options are displayed. Content Area (DesignCenter) Displays the content of the "container" currently selected in the tree view. A container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file, or web address (URL) containing information accessible by DesignCenter.
Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container. Stop (DC Online tab) Stops the current transfer. Reload (DC Online tab) Reloads the current page. Search Displays the Search dialog box, where you can specify search criteria to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within drawings. Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The Favorites folder contains shortcuts to items you access often.
Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format. List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list. Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded content. You can sort the items by name, size, type, and other properties, depending on the type of content that is loaded in the content area. Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only) Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have made.
content libraries. When a symbol is selected, it is displayed on the right side and can be downloaded into your drawing. NOTE The DesignCenter Online (DC Online tab) is disabled by default. You can enable it from the CAD Manager Control utility. Search Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of DesignCenter Searches for content such as drawings, hatch patterns, and blocks. List of Options The following options are displayed. Look For Specifies the type of content to search for.
Specifies a search path name. To enter multiple paths, separate them with semicolons. Use Browse to select a path from a tree view list. Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can specify the drives and folders to search. Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path. Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify. Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results panel.
Specifies the property fields to search. For drawings, all fields other than File Name are derived from the information entered in the Drawing Properties dialog box (DWGPROPS on page 451). This option is available on the Drawings tab. Search for the Name Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or other content type that you want to find. This option is available on all tabs except Drawings.
Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. Select At Least or At Most, and enter a value in KB. ADCNAVIGATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Content with DesignCenter Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. Summary The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the DesignCenter Folders tab. ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter.
ADDSELECTED Quick Reference See also: ■ Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Draw Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and click Add Selected. Summary Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties on page 1017 of an object.
Object type Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED ric, Angular, Arc Length, and Ordinate) Tolerance Dim Style Leader Dim Style, Dim Scale Multileader Multileader Style, Overall Scale Table Table Style Hatch Pattern, Scale, Rotation Block Reference, External Reference Name Underlays (DWF, DGN, Image, and PDF) Name List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method The prompts vary by object type.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust Summary With the ADJUST command, you can control several display settings for selected images and underlays (DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays). To confirm the settings, use the Properties palette. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. The list of prompts depends on whether you select one or more images, or one or more underlays. Images Fade Controls the fade effect in the image. Values range from 0 through 100.
Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all areas while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the underlay appears in shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more. If the background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are inverted, with the darkest areas displaying as white, and the lightest areas displaying as black. ALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Align Objects Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects. The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4). After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object.
The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6). ANNORESET Quick Reference See also: ■ Add and Modify Scale Representations Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Sync Scale Positions Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object.
ANNOUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Annotative Styles Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles. Summary When a non-annotative text object is updated to an annotative text style, the object becomes annotative and supports the current annotation scale. If the text style has a fixed Paper Height, the object is set to that height. If the text style’s Paper Height is set to 0, the size of the text does not change.
controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab. APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX on page 1611 system variable. ARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Arcs Creates an arc.
Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc. NOTE If you press ENTER without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline. Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: Second Point Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3).
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Specify a length End Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
(1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start point. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc: Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn. Specify radius of arc: Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt.
Summary The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box is displayed. If you enter -archive at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Packages the current sheet set files for archive. Summary The Sheets tab lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and according to subset organization. The Files Tree tab lists the files to be included in the package in a hierarchical tree format.
Files Tree Tab Lists the files to be included in the archive package in a hierarchical tree format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package. Included Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the archive package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package.
Add a File Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the archive package. This button is available on both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab. Enter Notes to Be Included with This Archive Provides a space where you can enter notes related to the archive package. The notes are included in the archive report.
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets List of Options The following options are displayed. Archive Type and Location Specifies the type and location of archive package created. Archive Package Type Specifies the type of archive package created. Archive Package Type Description Folder Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder.
Specifies the location in which the archive package is created. Lists the last nine locations in which archive packages were created. To specify a new location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want. If this field is left blank, the archive file is created in the folder containing the sheet set data (DST) file. Archive File Name Specifies the method for naming the archive package. Displays the default file name for the archive package.
■ Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or to a folder within the root folder tree. ■ A Fonts folder is created, if necessary. ■ A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary. ■ A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder. This option is not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet location.
NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications when the drawings have been removed. Include Options Specifies the various options available with the archive package. Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the archive package. Include Files from Data Links Adds external files referenced by a data link to the transmittal package. Include Textures from Materials Includes textures with materials that are attached to objects or faces.
Password for Compressed Archive Package Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package. When others attempt to open the archive package, they must provide this password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive packages. Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.
AREA Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas. Summary Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA, MEASUREGEOM on page 736, and MASSPROP on page 725. Alternatively, use BOUNDARY on page 151 to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST on page 710 or the Properties palette on page 1015 to find the area. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids. Select object: If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored. The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations.
You can also select to specify the points. A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in green. Press ENTER. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first.
ARRAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Array Objects Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Array. Summary You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or path array. The DELOBJ on page 1433 system variable controls whether the source objects of the array are deleted or retained after the array is created.
Rectangular (ARRAYRECT on page 60) Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. Path (ARRAYPATH on page 53) Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path. Polar (ARRAYPOLAR on page 57) Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or axis of rotation. -ARRAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Array Objects Maintains legacy command line behavior for creating nonassociative, 2D rectangular or polar arrays.
The selected object, or cornerstone element, is assumed to be in the lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right. The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed. Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle.
Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the number of items), you must specify both.
ARRAYCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Array Objects Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state. Access Methods Panel Ribbon: ➤ Edit Array contextual panel Summary The Soure option of ARRAYEDIT on page 48 activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects of a selected array item. While the editing state is active, an Edit Array contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon. Save or discard changes to exit the editing state.
Discard Changes Button ➤ Edit Array contextual panel ➤ Discard Changes Discards any changes made; the source object or replacement item in the array is returned to its original state. ARRAYEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Associative Arrays Edits associative array objects and their source objects.
List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select array: Use an object selection method The array type determines the remainig prompts.
Item in Array Selects the item whose source objects are to be replaced, and continues to prompt for additional items. ■ Source objects. Replaces the original set of source objects in the array, which updates all items that have not been previously replaced. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array. Path arrays are repositioned relative to the new base point. Rows Specifies the number and spacing of rows, and the incremental elevation between them.
Align Items (Path Arrays) Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction. Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item (ARRAYPATH, Orientation option). Z Direction (Path Arrays) Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Angle Between (Polar Arrays) Specifies the angle between items.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Array Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Columns Panel (Rectangular Arrays) Column Count Specifies the number of columns. Column Spacing Specifies the spacing of columns. Total Column Distance Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns. Items Panel (Path and Polar Arrays) Item Count Specifies the number of items. Item Spacing Specifies the spacing of items.
Divide (Path Arrays) Redistributes items to divide evenly along the length of the path. Align Items (Path Arrays) Controls the whether to maintain the starting orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the starting orientation. Z Direction (Path Arrays) Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Rotate Items (Polar Arrays) Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Path option in ARRAY on page 43. The path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
■ Normal. Objects are aligned to be normal to the starting direction of the path. NOTE The Align Items on page 56 option controls the whether to maintain the starting orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the starting orientation. Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation. Base Point Specifies a base point for the array.
Divide Divides items evenly along the entire length of the path. Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last items. Expression on page 55 Associative Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object, or as independent objects. ■ Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and source objects of the array. ■ No. Creates array items as independent objects.
Z Direction Controls whether to maintain the items’ original Z direction or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Exit Exits the command. ARRAYPOLAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Polar Arrays Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or axis of rotation.
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point or axis of rotation. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Angle Between Specifies the angle between items. Expression on page 58 Fill Angle Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array. Expression on page 58 Associative Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object, or as independent objects. ■ Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and source objects of the array. ■ No.
ARRAYRECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Rectangular Arrays Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array dropdown ➤ Rectangular Array Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Rectangular Array Toolbar: Modify Summary This command is equivalent to the Rectangular option in ARRAY on page 43. Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify opposite corner for number of items on page 61 or [Base point on page 61/Angle on page 61/Count on page 61] : Enter an option or press Enter Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative on page 61/Base point/Rows on page 62/Columns on page 62/Levels on page 62/eXit on page 62] : Press Enter or select an option Items Specifies the number of items in the array. Use the preview grid to specify a point that reflects the desired configuration.
Rows Edits the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental elevation between them. Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation. Total Sets the total distance between the first and last rows. Columns Edits the number and spacing of columns. Expression on page 62 Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns. Levels Specifies the number and spacing of levels.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Summary The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type to Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats. -ATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Inserts an external reference, raster image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN files) in the current drawing.
Scale Factor Resizes the underlay. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48. Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay. PDF Underlay Prompts Path to File Enters the location of the PDF file including the file name. Page Number Enters a page number. ? Enters multiple pages. * Lists pages available in the PDF file.
Scale Factor Resizes the image. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48. Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay. External Reference Prompts Path to File Enters the location of the external reference file including the file name. Reference Type Selects whether to attach this file as an underlay or an overlay. Press Enter to attach the file as an underlay (attachment).
Scale Factor Resizes the external reference. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the external reference will display at 72 x 48. Unit Changes the type of units to scale the external reference. ATTACHURL Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
ATTDEF Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes. Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Summary The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed. If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed. An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Mode Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing. The default values are stored in the AFLAGS on page 1380 system variable. Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert the block. ATTDISP on page 74 overrides Invisible mode.
Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set.
Specify On-Screen Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes. Use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with. X Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Text Settings Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
Boundary Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes. Align Below Previous Attribute Definition Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you have not previously created an attribute definition, this option is not available.
The AFLAGS on page 1380 system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to set the default modes. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the block. ATTDISP on page 74 overrides Invisible mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute.
Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER Specify paper text height : Specify a height, or press ENTER The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is . For a description of each option, see TEXT on page 1229. NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters.
ATTDISP Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.
The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings. The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE on page 1388 system variable. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] : Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed. On Makes all attributes visible, overriding the original visibility settings.
Edit Attributes Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) Changes attribute information in a block. Summary To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT. List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block.
on page 1387 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. Previous Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display the additional attributes. Next Displays the next eight attribute values. If the block contains no additional attributes, Next is unavailable.
The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change any properties of the attribute you select. Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] : Enter the property to change, or press Enter for the next attribute If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value.
Height Changes the text height. When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text. Angle Changes the rotation angle. If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the specified point and the start point of the text. Style Changes the style setting. Layer Changes the layer. Color Changes the color.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book, such as PANTONE® 573. Next Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more attributes, ATTEDIT ends. No Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible and invisible attributes.
ATTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Attribute Extraction Summary The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed. If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Summary Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for the information. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Format Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data. Comma Delimited File (CDF) Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file.
Output File Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box. The .txt file name extension is appended for CDF or SDF files and the .dxx file name extension for DXF files.
Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract. ATTIPEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. Summary If you select a single-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 763 without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Right-click to display options. If you select a multiple-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 763 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler.
ATTSYNC Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes Toolbar: Modify II Summary You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks.
WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications. AUDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors.
AUTOCOMPLETE Quick Reference See also: ■ The Command Line Window Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt. Access Methods Command entry: Right-click within the Command Window ➤ AutoComplete ➤ option Summary Entering a command or system variable at the Command prompt is assisted with several features that list or complete the commands and system variables as they are being typed. The AUTOCOMPLETE command controls which of the features are turned on.
Off Suppresses the operation of AUTOCOMPLETE features without changing their settings. AUTOPUBLISH Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Publish Options Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified location. Access Methods Menu: Application menu ➤ Options ➤ Plot and Publish tab Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options. Select the Plot and Publish tab.
Location Specifies a directory where the published drawings are stored. Opens Select a Folder for Generated Files dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 826). Auto Publish Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Publish Options Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified location. Summary Specifies options for publishing drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files when you save or close a drawing file, or issue the AUTOPUBLISH on page 88 command.
Click the [...] button to specify a new location to save the published drawings. Include Specifies whether to publish the model, the layouts or both the model and layouts are saved when you publish drawings. General DWF/PDF options Specifies options for creating a single-sheet or multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, and PDF files. File Format Specifies whether the DWG should be published as a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.
B Commands 3 BACTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. Summary This command is available only in the Block Editor on page 127. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or changes when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when modified. Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer. ■ Specify opposite corner. Enter Distance Between Rows or Specify Unit Cell When an XY parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified.
Offset When BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 is set to 0 and the action is triggered, increases or decreases the angle of the selected parameter by the specified value. XY When an XY parameter is selected, specifies whether the distance applied to the action is the parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Rotate Specifies that the selection set of objects rotates when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
XY When an XY parameter is selected, sets the Scale Type custom property. ■ X. Scales the selected object only along the X-axis of the XY parameter. ■ Y. Scales the selected object only along the Y-axis of the XY parameter. ■ XY. Scales the selected object along both the X- and Y-axes of the XY parameter. Stretch Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 92 ■ Multiplier on page 92 ■ Offset on page 93 ■ XY on page 93 Select Objects Select Objects on page 92 Polar Stretch Specifies that the selection set of objects stretches or moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter. Specify Parameter Point Determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine the base point of the action.
Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Show All Actions Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Hide All Actions Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionbar Summary You can only use the BACTIONBAR command in the Block Editor on page 127 and when in Action Bar mode (BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 system variable is set to 1). The BACTIONBAR command controls the display of action bars for parameter objects in the Block Editor.
Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionset Shortcut menu: Select an action in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Action Selection Set, and then click an option. Summary Re-specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action by creating a new selection set or by adding to or removing objects from the existing selection set. You can only use the BACTIONSET command in the Block Editor on page 127.
BACTIONTOOL Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. Access Methods Panel Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel Command entry: bedit ➤ bactiontool Summary Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or changes when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters.
Specifies that the selection set of objects arrays when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. An array action can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Select Parameter Select a parameter to associate with the action. Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when modified. Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified.
Specify Selection Set Determines the objects that will be mirrored about the flip parameter reflection line. Move Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down ➤ Move Specifies that the selection set of objects moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A move action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Specifies that the selection set of objects rotates when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A rotate action can only be associated with a rotation parameter. Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 99 Select Objects Select Objects on page 99 Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99 Base Type Specifies whether the base point for the action is dependent or independent of the associated parameter’s base point.
Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Actions drop-down ➤ Scale Specifies that the selection set of objects scales relative to the defined base point when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Specify Stretch Frame Creates a box that represents the boundary area for the action when modified. ■ Specify opposite corner. ■ Specify objects. CPolygon Creates a polygon that represents the boundary area for the action when modified. ■ First polygon point. ■ Specify endpoint.
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 99 ■ Multiplier on page 100 ■ Offset on page 100 BASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Set Base Point Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use) Summary The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS.
Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition. Summary Associates an orphaned action with a parameter. You can only use the BASSOCIATE command in the Block Editor on page 127. An action becomes orphaned when the parameter with which it is associated is removed from the block definition. NOTE The BASSOCIATE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 system variable is set to 1. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block Definition panel ➤ Manage Attributes Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Toolbar: Modify II Summary The Block Attribute Manager is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by choosing Settings.
Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt sequence. The Move Up button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt sequence. The Move Down button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Edit Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box, where you can modify attribute properties. Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block definition.
■ Properties on page 112 List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited. Auto Preview Changes Controls whether or not the drawing area is immediately updated to display any visible attribute changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is selected, changes are immediately visible. If Auto Preview Changes is cleared, changes are not immediately visible. Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small improvement in performance.
Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute. Verify Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block. If this option is cleared, verification is not performed.
Text Style Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down.
Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab. Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text. Color Specifies the attribute's text color. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text.
Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute list. Only the selected properties are displayed in the list. The Tag property is always selected. Select All Selects all properties. Clear All Clears all properties.
Apply Changes to Existing References Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances of the block whose attributes you are modifying. If selected, updates all instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. If cleared, updates only new instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to apply changes immediately to existing block instances. This temporarily overrides the Apply Changes to Existing References option.
Attribute Definitions Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Move Up Moves the selected attribute definition up in the list. Move Down Moves the selected attribute definition down in the list. BAUTHORPALETTE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Block Authoring Tools Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Block Authoring Tools Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. Summary You can close the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor. BCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the Block Editor ■ Define Blocks ■ Modify Blocks Closes the Block Editor.
Summary Closes the Block Editor. If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes. BCONSTRUCTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Construction Geometry Within a Block Converts geometry into construction geometry. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Construction Summary The BCONSTRUCTION command is used in the Block Editor on page 127 to convert geometry into construction geometry.
Convert Converts the valid selected objects into construction geometry and displays the number of objects converted. Authoring objects are not converted. Revert Changes the selected objects back to regular geometry. The geometry is set to the current layer. Show All Displays all construction geometry. Hide All Hides all construction geometry. BCYCLEORDER Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference.
Summary When you insert a dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the Ctrl key to cycle through the grips that have cycling turned on in the block definition. The grip you select as you cycle is used as the insertion point for the block reference. List of Options The following options are displayed. Grip Cycling List Lists the grips in the dynamic block definition. A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip.
BEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks ■ Modify Blocks ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor. Summary The Edit Block Definition dialog box on page 121 is displayed.
Edit Block Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks ■ Modify Blocks ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to create in the Block Editor. Summary When you click OK, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed.
Specifies the name of the block to edit or create in the Block Editor. If you select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. After you add dynamic elements to the drawing, you can then save it and insert it as a dynamic block reference in a drawing. Name List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When you select a block definition from the list, the name is displayed in the Name box.
Geometric Panel Auto Constrain Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another. Coincident (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). Colinear (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. Concentric (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. Fix (GEOMCONSTRAINT) Locks points and curves in position.
Dimensional Panel Linear (BCPARAMETER) Creates a horizontal or vertical constraint parameter based on the locations of the extension line origins and the location of the dimension line similar to the DIMLINEAR command. Horizontal (BCPARAMETER) Creates a horizontal constraint parameter by picking two constraint points. Valid objects include lines and polyline segments. Vertical (BCPARAMETER) Creates a vertical constraint parameter by picking two constraint points.
Parameters Manager Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. Authoring Palettes Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. Block Editor Settings Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. Action Parameters Panel Point (BPARAMETER on page 154) Defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference.
Polar Stretch (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects stretches or moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter. Scale (BACTIONTOOL on page 98) Specifies that the selection set of objects scales relative to the defined base point when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Close Panel Close Block Editor Closes the Block Editor. Block Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks ■ Modify Blocks ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and edit geometry as you would in the drawing area. Summary You use the Block Editor to define the objects and behavior for a block definition. In the Block Editor, you add parameters and actions, which define custom properties and dynamic behavior.
■ BCYCLEORDER ■ BCONSTRUCTION on page 117 ■ BGRIPSET ■ BLOOKUPTABLE ■ BPARAMETER ■ BSAVE ■ BSAVEAS ■ BTABLE on page 166 ■ BTESTBLOCK on page 170 ■ BVHIDE ■ BVSHOW ■ BVSTATE When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor also provides a Block Editor toolbar and Block Authoring palettes that contain tools for creating dynamic blocks.
Save Block Definition Saves the current block definition. Save Block As Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Name Displays the name of the current block definition. Test Block (BTESTBLOCK on page 170) Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block. Display / Hide Constraints Bar (CONSTRAINTBAR on page 224) Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object. Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
Point Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a point parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference. A point parameter defines an X and Y location in the drawing. In the Block Editor, a point parameter looks similar to an ordinate dimension. Linear Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom distance property for the block reference. A linear parameter shows the distance between two anchor points.
Visibility Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds a visibility parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom visibility property for the block reference. With visibility parameter, you can create visibility states and control the visibility of objects in the block. A visibility parameter always applies to the entire block and needs no action associated with it. In a drawing, you click the grip to display a list of visibility states available for the block reference.
Polar Stretch Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a polar stretch action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a polar parameter. A polar stretch action rotates, moves, and stretches objects a specified angle and distance when the key point on the associated polar parameter is changed through a grip or the Properties palette Rotate Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a rotate action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a rotation parameter.
Linear Array Automatically adds an array action associated with the linear parameter. Linear Move Pair Automatically adds a two move action, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter. Linear Stretch Pair Automatically adds two stretch actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter. Polar Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the polar parameter.
Lookup Set Automatically adds a lookup action associated with the lookup parameter. -BEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks ■ Modify Blocks ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Summary If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt, the selected block is opened in the Block Editor on page 127.
Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box. Access Methods Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Dialog Box Launcher Command entry: besettings Summary The Block Editor Settings dialog box on page 135 is displayed.
Summary Controls the environment settings of the Block Editor. List of Options The following options are displayed. Authoring Objects Controls the color of parameter and grip objects and specifies the orientation of the parameter text. Parameter Color Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor. (BPARAMETERCOLOR on page 1401 system variable) Grip Color Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor.
Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. (BGRIPOBJSIZE on page 1398 system variable) Constraint Status Specifies the color overrides for objects in the Block Editor to show constraint status. Unconstrained Sets the color of the unconstrained objects. Partially Constrained Sets the color of the partially constrained objects. Fully Constrained Sets the color of the fully constrained objects.
BGRIPSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a parameter in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Grip Display, and then click an option. Summary Specifies the number of grips displayed for a parameter. Also resets the position of grips for a parameter to their default location.
Summary The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. If you enter bhatch, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546is displayed. If you enter -bhatch or -hatch, Command prompts are displayed. BLEND Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Splines Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Blend Menu: Modify ➤ Blend Curves Summary Select each object near an endpoint.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object or [CONtinuity]: Select a line or open curve near the end where the spline should start Select second object: Select another line or open curve near the end where the spline should end Continuity Specify one of two types of blends. Tangent Creates a degree 3 spline with tangency (G1) continuity to the selected objects at their endpoints.
To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing. BLOCKICON Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Blocks Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons Summary Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-card characters.
BLOOKUPTABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Lookup Actions Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition. Summary When a lookup action is applied to a lookup parameter on page 160, the Property Lookup Table dialog box is automatically displayed. If a table is already defined for the lookup action, then that table is displayed in the dialog box. NOTE The BLOOKUPTABLE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on page 1396 system variable is set to 1.
Summary The lookup table assigns custom property values to the dynamic block reference. If Reverse Lookup is selected for a lookup property, the block reference displays a lookup grip with a list of properties that change the display of the dynamic block reference. The lookup table also allows the values of lookup parameters to be controlled by the values of other parameters (input properties). List of Options The following options are displayed.
Lookup Properties Displays the custom value assigned to the input properties. Click the bottom of a lookup column to make the lookup property read-only or to allow reverse lookup. Allow Reverse Lookup enables a drop-down list associated with the lookup grip that changes the block reference to match the input property values in the table. Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Lookup Actions Adds parameter properties to a lookup table.
BLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks Creates a block definition from selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block Definition panel ➤ Create Block Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Toolbar: Draw Summary The Block Definition dialog box is displayed. If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed. You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing. Preview If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block. Base Point Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
Z Specifies the Z coordinate value. Objects Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block. Specify On-Screen Prompts you to specify the objects when the dialog box is closed. Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.
Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the Annotative option is cleared. Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non-uniformly scaled. Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded. Settings Specifies settings for the block. Block Unit Specifies the insertion units for the block reference.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ? Block Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1.
The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system, which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation in space by setting the UCS first. ?—List Previously Defined Blocks Lists the block names in the text window.
Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), Command prompts are displayed.
Boundary Creation Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object. Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set.
Island Detection Specifies whether boundary uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island detection at the Command prompt, see the HATCH Command prompt option. Object Type Specifies the type of object that boundary creates. ■ Region ■ Polyline BPARAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
Alignment Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters drop-down ➤ Alignment Rotates the block reference about a point to align with other objects in the drawing. Specify Base Point of Alignment Specifies the grip about which the block reference will rotate to align with another object in the drawing. Name Sets the Name custom property for this parameter. Specify Alignment Direction Determines the angle of alignment for the block reference.
Specify Parameter Location Determines the X and Y location of the point parameter in the block definition. This will be the location of the point grip in the block reference. Name Name on page 155 Label Defines a custom descriptive label for the location of the parameter. Chain Determines whether the parameter is included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. ■ Yes.
Base Specifies the Base Location property for the parameter. ■ Startpoint. The start point of the parameter remains fixed when the endpoint of the parameter is edited in the block reference. ■ Midpoint. The midpoint of the parameter remains fixed, and the start point and endpoint of the parameter move simultaneously equal distances from the midpoint. Palette Palette on page 156 Value Set Limits the available values for the parameter to the values specified in the set. ■ List.
Label Label on page 156 Chain Chain on page 156 Description Description on page 156 Palette Palette on page 156 Value Set Value Set on page 157 Specify Endpoint Determines the distance and angle from the base point. The distance and angle are custom properties in the Properties palette.
■ 4. Grips will be displayed at all four corners of the parameter. Rotation Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters drop-down ➤ Rotation Defines an angle for the block reference. Specify Base Point Determines the point about which the selected block geometry will be rotated.
Name Name on page 155 Label Label on page 156 Description Description on page 156 Palette Palette on page 156 Specify Endpoint of Reflection Line Determines the endpoint of the reflection line. Specify Label Location Specify Label Location on page 157 Visibility Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Action Parameters drop-down ➤ Visibility Defines objects that will either display or not display within the block definition.
Label Label on page 156 Description Description on page 156 Palette Palette on page 156 BREAK Quick Reference See also: ■ Break and Join Objects Breaks the selected object between two points. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break at Point Menu: Modify ➤ Break Toolbar: Modify Summary You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on an object The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt, you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point. Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed. The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Web Summary Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser. BSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves the current block definition.
BSAVEAS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As Summary Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 165. You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 127. Save Block As Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition. Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. Description Displays the description saved with the block definition. Save Block Definition to Drawing File Saves the block definition as a drawing file. Selecting a pre-existing drawing file overwrites the saved file.
are located in the block definition. The grip location determines where the grip appears in the block reference and displays a context menu based on the contents of the block properties table. The type of properties that can be included in the block properties table include legacy parameters, parameter constraints, user parameters, and attributes. The legacy action parameters that are added to the lookup tables cannot be added to the Block Properties Table.
Summary You can press Shift+Enter to add a new line for a multiline attribute value in the grid in the Block Properties Table dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Add Properties Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 169 where you can add parameters already defined in the Block Properties Table. Audit Checks the Block Properties Table for errors. Grid Control Displays the name of parameters added to the table. You can also modify the properties of the table.
Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks Adds parameter properties to the block properties table. List of Options The following options are displayed. Parameter Properties Displays a list of dimensional constraint parameters, user parameters, legacy parameters, and attribute definitions. Name Displays the names of parameters available to add to the block properties table. Type Identifies the type of the parameter.
BTESTBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Test Blocks Within the Block Editor Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Test Block Summary You can only use the btestblock command in the Block Editor on page 127. With the Test Block window you can test a dynamic block without closing the Block Editor.
NOTE Please ensure that there are entities present in the block being tested before running the btestblock command. BVHIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Invisible Shortcut menu: Select objects to hide for visibility states.
BVSHOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Make Visible Shortcut menu: Select objects to make visible for visibility states. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area.
BVSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States Summary Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 173. You can only use the BVSTATE command in the Block Editor on page 127 after a visibility parameter has been added to the block definition.
Lists the available visibility states for the current dynamic block definition. The order of this list is reflected in the dynamic block reference when the grip is clicked to display the list of visibility states. The state at the top of the list is the default state for the block reference. Set Current Sets the selected visibility state as the current state to display in the Block Editor.
Specifies the name for the new visibility state. Visibility Options for New States Displays options for the new visibility state. Hide All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new visibility state. Show All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state.
Show All Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state. Current Visibility Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based. Set Specifies the visibility state to set as current. Delete Deletes a visibility state.
C Commands 4 CAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. Access Methods Command entry: 'cal for transparent use Summary CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that expects points, vectors, or numbers.
Understand Syntax of Expressions Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set ■ Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last ■ Operators of equal precedence from left to right Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined wi
Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table.
You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values: ■ 5' or 60” ■ 5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9” ■ 5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2” ■ 5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2” ■ 5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2” To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2.
124.6r 14g Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees. Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees. Use Points and Vectors Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector.
Point formats Coordinate system Point format WCS (instead of UCS) Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z] You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket (]). The following are valid points: [1,2] is the same as [1,2,0] [,,3] is the same as [0,0,3] [ ] is the same as [0,0,0] In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the (WCS).
getvar(variable_name) The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of the view in the current viewport. getvar(viewctr) With this method, you can also access the user system variables, USERI1-5 and USERR1-5.
CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.
Calculate a Vector from Two Points Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points. vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2. vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
Calculate the Length of a Vector Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The abs function calculates the length of a vector. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number. In spherical coordinates (dist
Obtain the Last-Specified Point Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Use the character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last point, as shown in the following example: Command: line Specify first point: 'cal >> Expression: cen+[0,1] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal >> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen) The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle.
When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable.
Convert Points Between UCS and WCS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS. w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS. u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS.
The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates: zof([2<45<45]) The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b: xyof(a)+zof(b) Calculate a Point on a Line Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line.
The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point. rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing through the point origin, as shown in the following example: rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example. The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5). Calculate a Distance Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2). dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2.
dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end) Obtain a Radius Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment. The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE command.
ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1,p2), oriented from p1 to p2. The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of the angle.
Calculate a Normal Vector Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal, not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment.
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection.
The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer and Fillet drop-down ➤ Chamfer Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer Toolbar: Modify Summary The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects. You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Loop Undo Reverses the previous action in the command. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered. Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.
way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set. Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS). Change Point or Values Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you select. Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change point to the new point, unless Ortho mode is on.
Properties Modifies properties of existing objects. NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed. Color Changes the color of the selected objects. For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located.
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect. Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects. Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90. Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects. CHPROP Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Changes the properties of an object.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acadlt.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype. Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
CHSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Move Objects Moves objects between model space and paper space. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Change Space Menu: Modify ➤ Change Space Summary The moved object is scaled appropriately in the new space. When transferring objects to paper space, the SOURCE viewport that you click determines the paper space location of the transferred objects.
CIRCLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Circles Creates a circle. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius Menu: Draw ➤ Circle ➤ Center, Radius Toolbar: Draw List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point on page 206 for circle or [3P on page 207/2P on page 207/Ttr (tan tan radius) on page 208]: Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second point. For example: 3P (Three Points) Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. For example: Tan, Tan, Tan Creates a circle tangent to three objects. For example: 2P (Two Points) Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. For example: CLASSICIMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Raster Images Manages referenced image files in the current drawing. Summary The legacy Image Manager is displayed. The IMAGE command now displays the External References palette.
NOTE This command will be removed in future releases. CLASSICLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. Summary The legacy Layer Properties Manager is displayed. The LAYER command displays the current Layer Properties Manager. NOTE This command will be removed in future releases. CLASSICXREF Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Manages referenced drawing files in the current drawing.
CLEANSCREENON Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Toolbars Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Command entry: Ctrl+0 Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen Summary The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing, the status bars, and the command line. Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore the display of interface items that were hidden by CLEANSCREENON.
Summary Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Use CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of most AutoCAD user interface elements. CLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip Underlays Crops a selected external reference, image, viewport, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN) to a specified boundary. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip Summary The clipping boundary determines a portion of an image, underlay, viewport, or external reference to hide.
If you clip the underlay again while clipping is off, clipping automatically turns on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original underlay. New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline.
■ Distance. Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel to the clipping boundary. ■ Remove. Removes both the front and back clipping planes. Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE on page 469 command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries.
Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied. CLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Closes the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: Application menu Menu: File ➤ Close ➤ Close ➤ Current Drawing Summary The current drawing is closed.
Access Methods Menu: Application menu Menu: Window ➤ Close All ➤ Close ➤ All Drawings Summary All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it. COLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Sets the color for new objects.
Select Color Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Defines the color of objects. Summary You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed. ■ Index Color ■ True Color ■ Color Books Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.
List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red, green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box. The large palette displays colors 10 through 249. The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as well as numbers.
the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting. Color Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the most recently selected color. Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color. New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
Summary Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. List of Options The following options are displayed. HSL Color Model Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors.
RGB Color Model Specifies the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create a wide range of colors. Red (R) Specifies the red component of a color.
Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Specifies colors using third-party color books or user-defined color books. Summary Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors.
seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use the up and down arrows to browse. RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component. Color Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number.
WARNING If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results. If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about assigning a color to a layer. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
You can display commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts in a dockable and resizable window called the Command Line. COMMANDLINEHIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window Hides the Command Line window. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line Summary Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Show/Hide Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraints Bars ➤ Select Objects Toolbar: Parametric Summary The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows: ■ Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related geometry. ■ Placing the cursor over a constrained object (while constraint bars are displayed) highlights the constraint icons associated with the selected object.
Reset Displays constraint bars for all objects with geometric constraints applied to them and resets them to their default locations relative to their associated parameters. CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Constraints Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.
Allows you to control the geometric constraints and dimensional constraints settings. List of Options The following options are displayed. The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following: ■ Geometric Tab ■ Dimensional Tab Geometric Tab Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars. Constraint Bar Display Settings Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
Sets the transparency level of constraint bars in a drawing. Dimensional Tab Sets preferences in behavior when displaying dimensional constraints. Dimensional Constraint Format Sets the display of the dimensional name format and lock icon. Dimension Name Format Specifies the format for the text displayed when dimensional constraints are applied. Set the name format to display: Name, Value, or Name and Expression.
CONTENTEXPLORER Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the Content Explorer Window ■ DesignCenter ■ Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings Finds and inserts content such as drawing files, blocks, and styles. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Plug-ins tab ➤ Content Panel ➤ Explore Summary With Content Explorer you can index design content for quick access, catalog the objects in each file, and search for content in local folders, network folders, and the Autodesk Seek Library.
Closes the Content Explorer window. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Plug-ins tab ➤ Content Panel ➤ Explore CONVERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD LT 95 or earlier. Sumary Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in AutoCAD LT 97 or later.
NOTE Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing commands make no distinction between the two formats. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] : Enter h for hatches, p for polylines, or a for both Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing. Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing.
For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the color-dependent plot style table. However, suppose that all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two colors, BLUE and GREEN.
color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have different plot properties. Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to Named Plot Styles A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before converting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB.
COPY Quick Reference See also: ■ Copy Objects Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy Menu: Modify ➤ Copy Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Copy Selection.
With the COPYMODE on page 1422 system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Second Point Determines a distance and direction for the array relative to the base point. By default, the first copy in the array is positioned at the specified displacement. The remaining copies are positioned in a linear array beyond that point using the same incremental displacement. Fit Positions the final copy in the array at the specified displacement. The other copies are fit in a linear array between the original selection set and the final copy.
■ When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to the specified base point. COPYCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Copy Clip Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy.
COPYHIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. Summary The text is copied to the Clipboard. COPYLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit OLE Objects in Drawings Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications.
COPYTOLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Copies one or more objects to another layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layers ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Toolbar: Layers II Summary Creates duplicates of selected objects on a layer that you specify. You can also specify a different location for the duplicated objects. If you enter -copytolayer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Name Enter or select Name to display the Copy to Layer dialog box on page 240. ■ Specify Base Point on page 239 ■ Displacement on page 239 Copy To Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Destination Layer Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can also enter a name to create a new layer.
Specify the Destination Layer Name Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can also enter a name to create a new layer. The new layer inherits the properties (on/off, freeze/thaw, locked/unlocked, etc.) of the current layer ? (List Layers) Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: * = (Select Object) Selects a destination layer by selecting an object on that layer.
For information about customizing the different user interface elements found in the Customize User Interface dialog box, see User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide. Customize User Interface Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand User Interface Customization Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts.
Summary Provides an interface for customizing workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, shortcut menus, and other user interface elements. NOTE When the Customize User Interface Editor is displayed using the Customize Commands option from the Tool Palettes window or the Customize option from the Quick Access toolbar or a toolbar, the Customizations In pane is collapsed and the Command List pane is expanded. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Available Customizations In toolbar Contains Load Partial Customization File and Save All Current Customization Files buttons. Load Partial Customization File Loads a CUIx file that you can add to the acadlt.cuix file. Save All Current Customization Files Saves changes to all loaded CUIx files. Image Manager Displays the Image Manager on page 253, in which you can import, export, and delete images stored in a loaded CUIx file.
Find Command or Text Searches the current CUIx for a selected command or matching text string. Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. Create a New Command Creates a new command. You can add or change properties and create or edit a button. Properties Pane Displays user interface properties that you can view, edit, or delete. General Displays the name and description of a command or user interface element. ■ Name - Displays the name of the user interface element.
Partial File Behavior Controls how ribbon tabs are displayed when in a CUIx file that is being loaded as a partial customization file. ■ Default Display - Specifies whether the ribbon tab is displayed on the ribbon when in a CUIx file that is loaded as a partial customization file. (Do Not Add to Workspaces or Add to Workspaces) ■ Workspace Behavior - Specifies how the ribbon tab is merged or added to the ribbon when this CUIx file is loaded as a partial customization file.
■ SplitButtonListStyle - Specifies how the commands on the drop-down will be displayed. (Icon, IconText, or Descriptive) ■ Button Style - Specifies the orientation, size, and label display of the button for the drop-down. (Large With Text (Vertical), Large With Text (Horizontal), SmallWithText, SmallWithoutText, or LargeWithoutText) ■ Grouping - Specifies whether commands under a drop-down are grouped together using their assigned group names.
■ Shrink - Specifies the width of Row Panel never decreases below the default size. Properties for Ribbon Fold Panels: ■ Default Size - Specifies the size of the panel contents in a floating panel. ■ Minimum Size - Specifies the smallest size each control in the panel collapses. ■ Maximum Size - Specifies the largest size each control in the panel expands. IMPORTANT Maximum Size must be greater than or equal to the Default Size, and Default Size must be greater than or equal to Minimum Size.
■ Description - Displays the description for the command. The description you enter is displayed in the status bar or in a tooltip. ■ Extended Help File - Displays the file name and ID from the extended help file that should be displayed when the cursor continues to hover over a toolbar, panel button, or menu item for a specified period of time. Click the [..] button to display the Select Extended Help File dialog box.
Quick Properties Pane Displays a list of object types and the properties associated to the selected object type. Edit Object Type List Controls which object types are used with the Quick Properties panel or rollover tooltips. Displays the Edit Object Type List dialog box. Object Type List Displays a list of the object types you can use with Quick Properties panel or rollover tooltips. General Displays the general properties that are available for all object types in the Properties list.
Summary You open a CUIx, CUI, MNS, or MNU file to import or export user interface data. When you open CUI, MNU, or MNS files, they are not converted automatically to a CUIx file format until you save the new file that is created. The original CUI, MNU, or MNS file is not modified. List of Options Customizations In panes When you enter cuiimport at the Command prompt, the main CUIx file is displayed (acadlt.cuix by default) in the right pane.
Button Editor Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Images for Commands Modifies or creates custom images used for commands. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Palette Sets the current color used by the editing tools. Standard Color Swatches Color swatches used to set of the standard 16 colors current. More Opens the Select Color dialog box. Editing Tools Provides tools for editing a custom image. Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color.
Erase Sets pixels to white. Click and drag over colored pixels to change them to white. Editing Area Provides a close-up view of the image for editing. Preview Displays a preview of the image currently being edited. The preview displayed shows the actual size of the image. Clear Clears the editing area. Undo Undoes the last editing action. Grid Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Customization Files List Lists the customization files that are currently loaded. Custom Images List Lists the images that are stored in the customization file selected from the Loaded Customization Files list. Import Imports an externally stored image into the selected customization file from the Loaded Customization Files list. Export Exports the selected custom images from the Custom Images list to an external local or network storage location.
Find and Replace Dialog Box - CUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Find and Replace Commands and Text in a CUIx File Finds a search string in a command or command property in either the Command List pane or the Available Customizations in pane, or replaces a search string with a new search string Summary Locates and replaces commands or command properties (command names, descriptions, or macros).
Restrict Search To Limits the search to the CUIx file you select from the drop-down list. By default, the main CUIx file (acadlt.cuix by default) is searched. Find Next Locates the next instance of the search string in the Name, Description, or Macros box in the Properties pane. If you search in the Command List pane, only commands in the list are located. If you search in the tree view in the Customizations In pane, the search starts in the tree view and continues to the commands in the Command List pane.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Export Customizations Summary Customization information can be transferred between the main and partial CUIx files. Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) opened by default. The main CUIx file (acadlt.cuix) is open in the left pane. You can drag items from one CUIx file to the other. Click Apply to save the changes and view the updated CUIx file.
CUILOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Manage Customization Files Loads a CUIx file. Summary Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box, where you can locate and load a CUIx file to customize or transfer user interface settings. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUILOAD displays the following Command prompt.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Customization Groups Lists the currently loaded customization files. File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You can either enter the file name or choose Browse to display the Select Customization File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Unload Unloads the customization group selected in the Customization Groups list. Load Loads the file specified under File Name.
CUIUNLOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Manage Customization Files Unloads a CUIx file. Summary Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box, which has the same options as CUILOAD. The only difference between the two commands is in the Command prompts. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUIUNLOAD displays the following Command prompt.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and click Customize Palettes. Summary The Customize dialog box is displayed. Customize Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize Tool Palettes Creates, modifies, and organizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. Imports and exports tool palette files. Summary The Tool Palettes window displays only the tool palettes for the current group or displays all tool palettes if no group is current.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Palettes Lists all available tool palettes. Right-click a tool palette to display a shortcut menu with the following options: ■ Rename. Changes the name of an existing tool palette. ■ New Palette. Creates a new empty tool palette. ■ Delete. Removes the tool palette from AutoCAD LT and the associated file on disk. NOTE A tool palette cannot be recovered after it is deleted.
NOTE Import all tool palettes (XTP files) before importing tool palette groups (XPG files). Right-click a tool palette to display a shortcut menu with the following options: ■ New Group. Creates a new tool palette group. ■ Remove. Deletes the reference to the tool palette from the tool palette group only; the tool palette is not removed from AutoCAD LT and the tool palette file on disk is not deleted.
Summary CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information. When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
D Commands 5 DATALINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Displays the Data Link dialog box. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Data Link Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager Summary A table can be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSX, or CSV) file. You can link to an entire spreadsheet, individual row, column, cell, or cell range in Excel. The Data Link Manager on page 266 is displayed.
Data Link Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Creates, edits, and manages data links. List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Link Tree View Displays links contained within the drawing. Also gives options for creating new data links. Excel Links Lists the Microsoft Excel data links within the drawing. If the icon displays a linked chain, then the data link is valid. If the icon displays a broken chain, then the data link is broken.
Create a New Excel Data Link Launches a dialog box where you enter the name for a new data link. Once a name has been created, the New Excel Data Link dialog box on page 267 is displayed. Details Lists information for the data link selected in the tree view above. Preview Displays a preview of the linked data as it would appear in the drawing table. When a data link is not currently selected then no preview is displayed.
Choose an Excel File Allows you to choose an established Microsoft XLS, XLSX, or CSV file to link to your drawing. At the bottom of this drop-down list, you can select a new XLS, XLSX, or CSV file from which to create a data link. Click the [...] button to browse for another Microsoft Excel file on your computer. Path Type Determines the path that will be used to find the file specified above. There are three path options: full path, relative path, and no path. ■ Full Path.
■ Entire columns (for example, A:A) ■ Sets of columns (for example, A:D) Click the button to the right of the text box to preview the linked range. Preview Window Displays a preview of your table using the options you have applied. More Options Displays more options. This button becomes available when you use an existing Excel file or browse for a new one. Cell Contents Options in this box will determine how data is imported into your drawing from your external source.
Start With Excel Formatting, Do Not Update Imports the formatting specified in the original XLS, XLSX, or CSV file into your drawing, but any changes made to the formatting are not included when the DATALINKUPDATE on page 270 command is used. DATALINKUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Updates data to or from an established external data link.
Data Link Specifies the name of a data link to update with data that has been changed in the external source file. Entering [?] lists the data links in the current drawing. All Data Links Updates all data links in all tables in the drawing with data that has been changed in the external source file. Write Data Link Updates the linked data in an external file with data that has been changed in a table in your drawing. A table that contains data links displays indicators around linked cells.
Show Displays the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects. Hide Hides the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects. DDEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit Toolbar: Text Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a text object.
■ Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box. ■ Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press Enter to end the command. Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can use this option immediately after editing. Edit Text Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Edits a single-line text object.
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately displayed in the tag field. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. Default Specifies the default attribute value. DDPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Specifies the display style and size of point objects.
Point Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon. List of Options The following options are displayed. Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE on page 1606 system variable. Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units.
DDVPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the 3D Projection Style Sets the 3D viewing direction. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Summary The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed. Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the 3D Projection Style Defines 3D view settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS). Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS. Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS. From Specifies viewing angles. X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis. XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane. You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles.
region. If you select the inner arc or an area inside it, the angle is not rounded off, and the result may be a fractional number. Set to Plan View Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the selected coordinate system. DELAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Run Slide Shows from Scripts Provides a timed pause within a script. Access Methods Command entry: 'delay for transparent use Summary Specifies the duration of a pause.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Delete Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Delete Constraints Toolbar: Parametric Summary The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line. Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects. DETACHURL Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. Summary Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the polyline is deleted.
Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DGN underlay. Access Methods Ribbon: DGN Underlay contextual tab ➤ Adjust panel Summary You can change the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome for a single or multiple DGN underlays. To confirm the settings on a selected DGN underlay, use the Properties palette.
DGNATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ DGN Underlay Toolbar: Insert Summary When you attach a DGN file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Names, locates, and defines the insertion point, scale, and rotation when attaching DGN underlays. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the DGN file you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on page 826). Select a design model from the DGN file Displays all of the design models that are found in the DGN file.
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected DGN file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected DGN underlay.
DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Underlays Change DGN underlay display, clip, layer, and osnap options. Summary When you select a DGN underlay in a drawing, the DGN Underlay Contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon. List of Options The following options are displayed. Adjust Panel Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary secondary color.
External References (EXTERNALREFERENCES on page 504) Opens the External References palette. DGN Layers Panel Edit Layers (ULAYERS on page 1281) Controls the display of layers in a DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay. -DGNATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Attach a DGN underlay from the command line. Summary When you attach a DGN file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing.
or “path name\filename.dgn” If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program adds the extension and searches for the file. Enter Name of Model or ? Enter a model name. For a list of models, enter?. Enter Model(s) to list <*> Lists the design models available in the DGN file in a separate text window. Conversion Units Matches the DWF file’s drawing units to the master units and sub-units specified in the DGN file.
DGNBIND (-DGNBIND) Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Binds DGN underlays to the current drawing. Summary Converts a specified DGN reference into a block, making it a permanent part of the drawing. The DGN-dependent named objects (such as layer names) of the former DGN reference are added to your drawing. In each DGN-dependent named object, the vertical bar (|) is replaced with three new characters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($).
Ribbon: DGN Underlay contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping Boundary Shortcut menu: Select a DGN underlay to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and click DGN Clip Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of a DGN underlay outside the boundary that is hidden. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the DGNFRAME on page 1433 system variable. The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the DGN underlay.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify for opposite corners. Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped either outside the boundary or inside the boundary. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected DGN underlay when the old boundary is deleted. DGNEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing.
WARNING Some programs that work with DGN files do not support extended characters that the Windows operating system considers valid for file names. Thus, it is recommended that you do not use accented or Asian characters in file names when using DGNEXPORT. Export DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files Controls how objects are processed when exporting them to a DGN file. List of Options The following options are displayed.
All referenced DWG files, including nested DWG references, are converted into DGN files. The resulting DGN files use the same file name as the DWG files, but use a .dgn file extension. With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite DGN reference files ■ Prompt to Overwrite ■ Overwrite without Prompting ■ Do Not Overwrite Bind All DWG References into One DGN file The parent DWG file and all referenced DWG files are combined into a single DGN file.
Conversion Units Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The DGN seed file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units. One DWG unit is converted to either one master unit or one sub-unit. Master Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one master unit of the specified DGN seed file. Sub Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one sub-unit of the specified DGN seed file.
DGN Seed File Name Master Unit (label) Sub Unit (label) Resolution V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Inches (“) 12”/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed2D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 100 POS V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 100 POS V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed2D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Metric-Seed2D.
Setup Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup. Mapping Setups Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 311 where new mapping setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified, or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 310). Mapping Preview for Setup Lists all properties of both the exported DWG file in the DWG column and the selected mapping setup in the DGN column.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD LT MicroStation Notes Colors Colors Colors are matched as closely as possible. Colors set with the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) are translated directly to the DGN color index. If TrueColor is used and a direct match of RGB values is available in the DGN color index, the colors are also mapped directly. If a TrueColor match is not available, an RGB value is added to the DGN color index.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD LT MicroStation Notes Dimensions, Dimension Styles Dimensions, Dimension Styles The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativity is maintained whenever possible, and the correct dimension values are always maintained. Raster Images Raster Images These image file types are supported: .bmp, .cal, .tif, .png, .tga, .jpg, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pcx. All other image file types are discarded.
-DGNEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files If you enter -dgnexport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter DGN file format on page 297 [V7/V8] : Specify whether the file is DGN V7 or V8 Enter filename on page 297 for DGN export : Specify path and filename of DGN file Specify conversion units on page 297 [Master/Sub] : Specify m or s, or press Enter Specify mapping se
Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model. ? After specifying a filter, a list of available export mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt. Seed File Specify a seed file that matches the existing behavior of other commands with filters. ? Enter * to display a list of available seed files in the AutoCAD Text Window.
NOTE The type of plot style drawing (Color-dependent or Named) is based on the value of PSTYLEPOLICY on page 1627. Import DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Specifies the import settings for a DGN file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Import into Current Drawing Inserts the contents of the DGN file into the current DWG file. Prefix Dependent Definitions Adds the DGN file and model name as a prefix to the incoming object’s name.
Ignore Duplicate Names Ignores any duplicate named objects, such as layer names or dimension styles, in the DGN file and gives precedence to the existing definition for duplicates. You can also control the default settings using the DGNIMPORTMODE system variable. NOTE For the correct display of linetypes, the MicroStation RSC (resource file) that is referenced by the DGN file must be available on your computer in a valid AutoCAD Support File Search Path when you import or attach the DGN file.
references. AutoCAD resolves these circular references by creating a block and insering it into the original primary DGN file. Design model references to sheet models, and sheet model references to other sheet models are not supported and are ignored. Unique names for references are generated by appending the model name to the design file name separated with a dash (-).
Master Units Specifies that one master unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit. Sub Units Specifies that one sub-unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit. NOTE The master units and the sub-units of the selected DGN file are displayed next to the buttons for reference. Explode Text Node to Text Elements Text node elements in a DGN file are multiple lines of text stored as one element, and are similar to MTEXT objects.
Lists all properties of both the imported DGN file in the DGN column and the selected mapping setup in the DWG column. NOTE External reference files properties are not listed in a mapping preview. See the DGNIMPORT Conversion Table on page 303 for specific details about the scope of importing MicroStation objects and other data. See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table on page 305 for specific details about unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects.
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation AutoCAD LT Notes Line Styles Linetypes For the correct display of linetypes, the MicroStation .rsc (resource file) that is referenced by the DGN file must be available on your computer in a valid AutoCAD Support File search path when you import or attach the DGN file. Dynamically scaled line styles (Standard DGN Line Styles 1-7) are converted into fixed-scale linetypes.
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation AutoCAD LT Notes Fields Fields In general, fields are translated as static text. The exceptions are fields that behave identically in both products. This includes the Date fields CreateDate, SaveDate, and PlotDate, and the Document property fields Author, Filename, and Filesize. Fields are converted to text when “Explode Text Nodes to Text Elements” is checked in the Import DGN Settings dialog box. Raster Images Raster Images These image file types: .bmp, .
The following table lists the linear units used in the resulting DWG file as determined by the master units, sub-units, and unit precision of the DGN file being imported.
DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table DGN Master Units DGN Sub Units DGN Precision DWG Units Notes Inches Any Other Unit Decimal Decimal Any Other Unit Any Other Unit Fractional Fractional For import of a V7 file, Master unit label will be read and will use the following table to set the Master units based on the unit translation table. The Resolution value will be used to set the Sub units. NOTE Unknown labels will be treated as “meters” and “decimeters.
-DGNIMPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files If you enter -dgnimport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Units Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file. Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model. ? After specifying a filter, a list of available import mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt. DGNLAYERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay.
DGNMAPPING Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Allows users to create and edit user-defined DGN mapping setups. Summary The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 311 is displayed. It can also be accessed from the Import DGN Settings and Export DGN Settings dialog boxes. The import/export process translates basic DGN/DWG data into the corresponding DWG/DGN data.
DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Creates new mapping setups, renames mapping setups, modifies mapping setups, and deletes mapping setups. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current User Displays the user’s login name. Name Lists all mapping setups. If the setup name is too long to be completely displayed, an ellipsis (...) is shown at the end. Type Specifies the mapping setup type: import or export.
Rename Starts in-place editing of the currently selected mapping setup (direct editing in the list). NOTE The Rename button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. Modify Displays the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 314, in which you can modify the currently selected mapping setup. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. Delete Deletes the currently selected mapping setup.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current User Displays the user’s login name. New DGN Mapping Setup Name Specifies the new mapping setup name. Based On Sets a mapping setup to use as a basis for the new one. For the new mapping setup, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Mapping Type Specifies what type of mapping setup to create. Import Specifies an import mapping type. Export Specifies an export mapping type.
Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Sets the properties for the selected mapping setup. Summary When you choose Continue in the New Mapping Setup dialog box, the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new mapping setup in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the mapping setup that you selected.
List of Options The Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box includes the following tabs: ■ Layer on page 315 ■ Linetype on page 315 ■ Lineweight on page 316 ■ Color on page 317 Layer The corresponding cells are automatically filled with the default mapping. The properties are added depending on which of the following mapping setups you are currently working on. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), the default system mapping is used.
You can directly type DGN linestyle names in the cells in the right column. If unknown linestyle names are added to the right column of the mapping table, they are ignored and default to Continuous. Import mapping setup: If you are in the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box by creating a new setup from the Import DGN Settings dialog box, the DGN column includes all defined DGN linestyles in the imported DGN file, as well as the DGN seed file used when the DGN file was created.
Color You can map color values between DGN to DWG files. By default the Color tab is blank and the default color mapping is used. Color translations between DGN color values is done to the closest AutoCAD color values and AutoCAD color values are mapped to the closest DGN color values. The Color tab is the only tab that allows editing in both columns. Values in the left-hand column must be unique. To remap colors, right-click either column and select Add Color from the right-click menu.
DGN column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu allows you to add a valid DGN color value to the cell. Valid colors include 0-255, ByLevel and ByCell. The DWG column is automatically populated with the equivalent RGB value. You can modify a DGN color by double-clicking the cell and typing a different value. DWG column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu brings up the Select Color dialog box on page 319. You can add ACI colors, true colors or color from a Color Book.
added to the DGN columns in the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box table. In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes MicroStation DGN (*.dgn) and All DGN Files (*.*) to recognize DGN files that have other extensions. NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs when adding properties from files. Add Properties from Drawing File Opens the Add Properties from Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Summary ■ Index Color on page 216 ■ True Color on page 218 ■ Color Books on page 221 DIM and DIM1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Dimensioning Accesses Dimensioning mode commands. Summary The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands on page 320. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command.
Dimensioning mode commands Command Description STYLE Changes the current text style. UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session. The following table shows which AutoCAD LT commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD LT command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE RADIUS DIMRADIUS RESTORE -DIMSTYLE Restore ROTATED DIMLINEAR Rotated SAVE -DIMSTYLE Save STATUS -DIMSTYLE Status TEDIT DIMTEDIT TROTATE DIMEDIT Rotate UPDATE -DIMSTYLE Apply VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE Variables VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical DIMALIGNED Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Aligned Dimensions Creates an aligned linear dimension.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Aligned Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned Toolbar: Dimension Summary Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable. If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. DIMANGULAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Creates an angular dimension.
Summary Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, extension lines are added as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Quadrant Specifies the quadrant that the dimension should be locked to. When quadrant behavior is on, the dimension line is extended past the extension line when the dimension text is positioned outside of the angular dimension. DIMARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Arc Length Dimensions Creates an arc length dimension.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Arc Length Menu: Dimension ➤ Arc Length Toolbar: Dimension List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or polyline arc segment: Use an object selection method Specify arc length dimension location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Partial/Leader]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information, see “Select and Modify Objects”. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Baseline Menu: Dimension ➤ Baseline Toolbar: Dimension Summary The default spacing between baseline dimensions can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing (DIMDLI on page 1454 system variable). If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
override this default behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press Enter.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break. Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Break Toolbar: Dimension Summary Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
intersecting points along the dimension object. To add the new dimension breaks, must be run the command again. Remove Removes all dimension breaks from the selected dimensions. Manual Places a dimension break manually. You specify two points on the dimension or extension lines for the location of the break. Any dimension break that is created using this option is not updated if the dimension or intersecting objects are modified. You can only place a single manual dimension break at a time with this option.
DIMCONTINUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue Menu: Dimension ➤ Continue Toolbar: Dimension Summary Automatically continues creating additional dimensions from the last linear, angular, or ordinate dimension created, or from a selected extension line. The dimension lines are lined up automatically.
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session.
Select a base dimension, or press Esc to end the command. Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session. Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location on page 338 or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD LT automatically draws an arc extension line.
Summary DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimensions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated.
The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the In-Place Text Editor. The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK.
DIMINSPECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect Menu: Dimension ➤ Inspection Toolbar: Dimension Summary Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
The Inspection Dimension Dialog Box is displayed and allows you to add or remove inspection dimensions from an existing dimension. Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. If you enter -diminspect at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Select Dimensions Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from. Remove Inspection Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimension. Shape Controls the shape of the frame that is drawn around the label, dimension value, and inspection rate of the inspection dimension. Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines.
The value is expressed as a percentage, and the valid range is 0 to 100. The inspection rate is displayed in the rightmost section of the inspection dimension when the Inspection Rate check box is selected. -DIMINSPECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Add inspection data on page 344 or [Remove on page 344] : Enter an option or press Enter Add Adds an inspection dimension to the selected dimensions.
Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Jogged Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Toolbar: Dimension Summary DIMJOGGED measures the radius of the selected object and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. The origin point of the dimension line can be specified at any convenient location. NOTE Jogged radius dimensions are also called foreshortened radius dimensions.
special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information, see “Select and Modify Objects”. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Linear Toolbar: Dimension Summary Jog lines in a dimension indicate a break in the objects being dimensioned. The dimension value represents the actual distance, rather than the measured distance in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension to add jog on page 347 or [Remove on page 347]: Select a linear or aligned dimension Add Jog Specifies the linear or aligned dimension to which to add a jog. You are prompted for the location of the jog.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Linear Menu: Dimension ➤ Linear Toolbar: Dimension Summary Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal, vertical, or rotated dimension line. This command replaces the DIMHORIZONTAL and DIMVERTICAL commands. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Select and Modify Objects”.
Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. ■ Mtext on page 349 ■ Text on page 349 ■ Angle on page 349 Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 348 ■ Mtext on page 349 ■ Text on page 349 ■ Angle on page 349 Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Ordinate Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate Toolbar: Dimension Summary Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Select and Modify Objects”.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Override Menu: Dimension ➤ Override Summary Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions, or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the settings defined by their dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text.
DIMREASSOCIATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Dimension Associativity Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Reassociate Menu: Dimension ➤ Reassociate Dimensions Summary Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt.
Press Esc to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions.
DIMREGEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Associative Dimensions Updates the locations of all associative dimensions. Summary The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated. Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in the following cases: ■ After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active; update associative dimensions created in paper space.
Summary Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference.
Summary The spacing between parallel dimension lines is made equal. You can also make the dimension lines of a series of linear or angular dimensions line up by using a spacing value of 0. Spacing is applied only to parallel linear dimensions or to angular dimensions that share a common vertex. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Toolbar: Styles ➤ Dimension Style Summary The Dimension Style Manager is displayed. A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that control the appearance of dimensions. You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to standards. If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Dimension Style Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create. Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles.
Don’t List Styles in Xrefs When selected, suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings in the Styles list. Preview Shows a graphic representation of the style selected in the Styles list. Description Describes the style selected in the Styles list relative to the current style. If the description is longer than the space provided, you can click in the pane and use arrow keys to scroll down. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply. List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with.
Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you define the new dimension style properties. New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Set properties for dimension styles. Summary When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box.
Lines Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks. Summary Sets the dimension line properties. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD system variable) Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line.
Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Color Sets the color for the extension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRE system variable.) Linetype Ext Line 1 Sets the linetype of the first extension line. (DIMLTEX1 system variable) Linetype Ext Line 2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line.
Offset From Origin Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension. (DIMEXO system variable) Fixed Length Extension Lines Enables fixed length extension lines. (DIMFXLON system variable) Length Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. (DIMFXL system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Symbols and Arrows Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions. Summary Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Second Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line.
Line Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable. Size Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable) Dimension Break Controls the gap width of dimension breaks. Break Size Displays and sets the size of the gap used for dimension breaks. Arc Length Symbol Controls the display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension.
Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. (DIMJOGANG system variable) Linear Jog Dimension Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value.
Text Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Lists the available text styles.
Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box on page 1181 where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMCLRT system variable) Fill Color Sets the color for the text background in dimensions.
■ Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. See the Offset from Dim Line option. ■ Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the first defining point. ■ JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation. ■ Below: Places the dimension text under the dimension line.
■ Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line. ■ Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line. View Direction Controls the dimension text viewing direction. (DIMTXTDIRECTION system variable) View Direction includes the following options: ■ Left-to-Right: Places the text to enable reading from left to right. ■ Right-to-Left: Places the text to enable reading from right to left.
Text Alignment Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position. Aligned with Dimension Line Aligns text with the dimension line. ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines.
Fit Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line. List of Options The following options are displayed. Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines.
When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables) Either Text or Arrows (Best Fit) Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension lines based on the best fit (DIMATFIT system variable). ■ When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines.
■ When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. ■ When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines. Both Text and Arrows When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, moves both outside the extension lines (DIMATFIT system variable). Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines Always places text between extension lines.
the dimension line. The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line. (DIMTMOVE system variable) Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader. (DIMTMOVE system variable) Scale for Dimension Features Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling. Annotative Specifies that the dimension is .
Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Primary Units Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text.
For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235. Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST system variable) If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to calculate the dimension distance in a sub unit when the distance is less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm. Sub-unit suffix Includes a suffix to the dimension value sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm for .96m to display as 96cm. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.
Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Alternate Units Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT system variable to 1. Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable).
Suffix Includes a suffix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1235.
Placement Controls the placement of alternate units in dimension text. After Primary Value Places alternate units after the primary units in dimension text. Below Primary Value Places alternate units below the primary units in dimension text. Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Tolerances Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Specifies the display and format of dimension text tolerances.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format. Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL system variable) ■ None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. ■ Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value.
■ Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. Different plus and minus values of variation are applied to the dimension measurement. A plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value, and a minus sign (-) precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0. ■ Limits: Creates a limit dimension. A maximum and a minimum value are displayed, one over the other.
Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. (DIMTM system variable) Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system variable. Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances.
Values are stacked by their operational symbols. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMTZIN system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'. Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed.
Summary You can save or restore dimensioning system variables to a selected dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: Annotative: Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative on page 398/Save on page 398/Restore on page 398/STatus on page 399/Variables on page 399/Apply on page 399/? on page 399] : Enter an option or press Enter Annotative Creates an dimension style.
displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables.
DIMTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dimension Text Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Text Angle Menu: Dimension ➤ Align Text ➤ Angle Toolbar: Dimension Summary The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, the orientation set by the text angle is retained. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation. The text angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS. DIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations Measures the distance and angle between two points.
Summary In general, the DIST command reports 3D distances in model space and 2D distances on a layout in paper space. In model space, changes in X, Y, and Z component distances and angles are measured in 3D relative to the current UCS. In paper space, distances are normally reported in 2D paper space units. However, when using object snaps on model space objects that are displayed in a single viewport, distances are reported as 2D model space distances projected onto a plane parallel to your screen.
DIVIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Divide an Object into Equal Segments Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Divide Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Divide List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included. Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the dividing points. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation. The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically oriented ellipse.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point or [“Break”/“Caps”/“Dragline”/“Snap”/“Width”]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter Break Determines whether a double line breaks when it intersects another double line, a single line, or an arc. Caps Specifies the placement of endcaps on a double line. The specified ends are capped, whether or not they snap to an object. Both Places endcaps on both the start point and endpoint of a double line.
DONUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Donuts Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut Menu: Draw ➤ Donut Summary A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The location of the donut is set based on the center point. After you specify the diameters, you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts. A donut is drawn at each point specified (2). How the interior of a donut is filled depends on the current setting of the FILL command. DOWNLOADMANAGER Quick Reference See also: ■ Browse Material Libraries Reports the status of the of the current download.
DRAGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. Access Method Command entry: 'dragmode for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] : Enter an option or press Enter On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging. Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items.
DRAWINGRECOVERY Quick Reference See also: ■ Recover from a System Failure Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Open the Drawing Recovery Manager Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Recovery Summary Opens the Drawing Recovery Manager.
Summary You can preview and open each drawing or backup file to choose which one should be saved as the primary DWG file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Backup Files Displays the drawings that may need to be recovered after a program or system failure. A top-level drawing node contains a set of files associated with each drawing.
Open Opens the selected drawing or backup file for drawing recovery. You can select multiple files using Shift and Ctrl. Properties Displays the File Properties dialog box from Windows Explorer for the selected drawing or backup file. Expand All Expands all top-level drawing nodes. Access this option by right-clicking a blank area in the Backup Files area. Collapse All Collapses all top-level drawing nodes. Access this option by right-clicking a blank area in the Backup Files area.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring to Front Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring to Front Toolbar: Draw Order Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order. Summary Use the DRAWORDERCTL system variable to control the default display behavior of overlapping objects. In addition, the TEXTTOFRONT command brings all text and dimensions in a drawing in front of other objects, and the HATCHTOBACK command sends all hatch objects behind other objects.
some edit operations taking slightly longer. You can use DRAWORDERCTL to change the default draw order settings. DSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Precision Tools Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, Dyn or Quick Properties on the status bar. Click Settings. Summary The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed.
■ Object Snap on page 420 ■ Dynamic Input on page 424 ■ Quick Properties on page 426 ■ Selection Cycling on page 428 List of Options The following options are displayed. Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Specifies Snap and Grid settings. Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE system variable.
Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Equal X and Y Spacing Forces the X and Y spacing to the same values for snap spacing and for grid spacing. The snap spacing intervals can be different from the grid spacing intervals. Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance.
set on the Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting polar tracking point. (SNAPTYPE system variable) Grid On Turns the grid on or off. You can also turn grid mode on or off by clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7, or by using the GRIDMODE on page 1522 system variable. Grid Style Sets the grid style in 2D contexts. You can also set grid style by using the GRIDSTYLE on page 1522 system variable. 2D Model Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for 2D model space.
Grid Behavior Controls the appearance of the grid lines that are displayed when SHADEMODE is set to Hidden. Adaptive Grid Limits the density of the grid when zoomed out. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing: Generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines.
Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths. You can enter any angle, or select a common angle of 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, or 5 degrees from the list. (POLARANG system variable) Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable.
NOTE Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object snap tracking on and off. Polar Angle Measurement Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured. Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS). Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn. Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls running object snap settings.
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable) Object Snap Modes Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps. Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray. Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, polyline segment, region, spline, or xline.
Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids created in AutoCAD.
Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, or text. Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, polyline, ray, region, 2D solid, spline, or xline. Deferred Perpendicular snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle, polyline, ray, or xline as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line.
Snaps to the visual intersection of two objects that do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect in the current view. Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended along their natural paths. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids created in AutoCAD.
Enable Pointer Input Turns on pointer input. When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on, dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available. (DYNMODE system variable) Pointer Input Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor. When a command prompts you for a point, you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of in the Command window. Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input.
dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of dimensional input. Settings Displays the Dimension Input Settings dialog box. Dynamic Prompts Displays prompts in a tooltip near the cursor when necessary in order to complete the command. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of dynamic prompts.
Enable Quick Properties Palette Displays the Quick Properties palette when you select objects, depending on the object type. (QPMODE on page 1632 system variable) The PICKFIRST on page 1612 system variable must be turned on to display the Quick Properties palette. Alternatively, you can enter the QUICKPROPERTIES on page 1060 command to select objects. Palette Display Sets the display settings of the Quick Properties palette. See Quick Properties for more information.
Cursor-Dependent The Quick Properties palette displays in a location relative to the cursor. (QPLOCATION on page 1631 system variable) Quadrant: Specifies which of four quadrants relative to the cursor to display the Quick Properties palette relative to the cursor location. The default location is above and to the right of the cursor. Distance in Pixels: Specifies the distance in pixels from the cursor to display the Quick Properties palette. You can specify integer values from 0 to 400.
Allow Selection Cycling You can also set this option with the SELECTIONCYCLING on page 1651 system variable. Display Selection Cycling List Box Displays the Selection Cycling List box. Cursor Dependent Moves the list box relative to the cursor. Quadrant Specifies in which quadrant of the cursor to position the list box. Distance in Pixels Specifies the distance between the cursor and the list box. Static The list box does not move with the cursor and remains in the same position.
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Controls the settings of pointer input tooltips. List of Options The following options are displayed. Format Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on. Polar Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in polar coordinate format. Enter a comma (,) to change to Cartesian format.
When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips only when you start to enter coordinate data. (DYNPIVIS system variable) When a Command Asks for a Point When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips whenever a command prompts you for a point. (DYNPIVIS system variable) Always—Even When Not in a Command Always displays tooltips when pointer input is turned on.
Resulting Dimension Displays a length dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Length Change Displays the change in length as you move the grip. Absolute Angle Displays an angle dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Angle Change Displays the change in the angle as you move the grip. Arc Radius Displays the radius of an arc, which is updated as you move the grip.
Displays the Drawing Window Colors dialog box, where you can specify a color for drafting tooltips and their backgrounds in a specified context. Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller. Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque.
Summary You can change the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome for a single or multiple DWF and DWFx underlays. To confirm the settings on a selected DWF or DWFx underlay, use the Properties palette. NOTE You can also use the ADJUST on page 20 command to change the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings for DWF underlays as well as DWF, DWFx and PDF underlays or the fade, contrast and brightness for images.
Insert a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay into the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ DWF Underlay Toolbar: Insert Summary The Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Once you select a DWF or DWFx file, the Attach DWF Underlay dialog box is displayed. After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the underlay through the DWF Underlay Ribbon Contextual Tab on page 438.
Name Identifies the DWF or DWFx file you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on page 826). Select one of more sheets from the DWF file Displays all of the sheets that are found in the DWF file. If the DWF file only contains a single sheet, that sheet is listed. You can select multiple sheets by holding the Shift key or the Ctrl key while selecting the sheets to attach. If you hover over the preview, the file name displays.
Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0. Show Details Displays the DWF file path. Found In Displays the path where the DWF file is located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the DWF file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.
NOTE This only changes the name of the DWF or DWFx reference when it is attached. It does not affect the name of the DWF or DWFx file. DWF Underlay Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Underlays Change DWF underlay display, clip, layer, and osnap options. Summary When you select a DWF underlay in a drawing, the DWF Underlay Contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon. List of Panels Adjust Panel Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay.
Options Panel Show Underlay Hides or displays the underlay. Enable Snap Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in the DWF underlay. External References Displays the External References palette. DWF Layers Panel Edit Layers Controls the display of layers in a DWF Underlay. -DWFATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Attach a DWF underlay from the command line.
or “path name\filename.dgn” If you enter a valid DWF file name without a file extension, the program adds the extension and searches for the file. Enter Name of Sheet or ? Enter a sheet name. For a list of sheets, enter ?. Enter Sheet(s) to list <*> Lists the sheets available in the DWF file in a separate text window. Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected DWF file. Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected DWF underlay and the scale factor units.
Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an image outside the boundary that is hidden. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the DWFFRAME on page 1486 system variable. The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the DWF or DWFx underlay. TIP Use the generic CLIP on page 211 command to clip images, external references, viewports, and underlays. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected DWF underlay when the old boundary is deleted. DWFFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish Drawings Sets the default format to DWF or DWFx for output in specific commands. Summary The latest version of Autodesk’s Design Web Format (DWF) is DWFx. DWFx uses Microsoft’s XML Paper Specification (XPS) to provide viewing and publishing capabilities that are independent from Autodesk software.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Underlay Layers Shortcut menu: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF Layers Summary After selecting the DWF underlay, the Underlay Layers dialog box on page 1282 is displayed. The ULAYERS on page 1281 command allows you to manage the layers of all underlays in the current document: DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN.
DWG Convert Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Drawing File Formats Change drawings from one AutoCAD drawing type to another. Displays a list of drawing files that you want to convert. All files to be converted are indicated by a checkmark next to the file name. Right-click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu with several options. List of Options The dialog box contains the following options Files Tree Tab Displays a list of drawing files selected for conversion.
add drawing files by clicking the Add button or by dragging a file. You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking a column heading. Files Table Tab Displays the list of drawing files to be converted in a table format. By default, all files associated with the drawing (such as related external references) are listed. Add File Button Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select drawing files to add to the conversion list.
Conversion Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Drawing File Formats Creates, renames, modifies, and deletes conversion setups. List of Options Conversion Setups Displays a list of previously saved conversion setups as well as the default setup; Standard. New Opens the New Conversion Setup dialog box on page 447, where you can add a new conversion setup based on an existing conversion setup. Rename Renames a conversion setup that appears in the list.
New Conversion Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Drawing File Formats Creates a new conversion setup List of Options New Conversion Setup Name Enter the name of the new conversion setup. Based On Select an existing conversion setup that the new one will use as its basis.
List of Options Conversion Package Type Specifies the type and location of the selected conversion setup. In-place (Overwrite Files) Creates a conversion package of uncompressed files that overwrite the existing files in the original folder. Folder (Set of Files) Creates a conversion package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder. Self-extracting Executable (*.exe) Creates a conversion package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file.
objects may have multiple scale representations. Annotative objects are decomposed and scale representations are saved to separate layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a number. Conversion File Folder Specifies the location in which the conversion package is created. Lists the last nine locations in which conversion packages were created. To specify a new location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want.
■ A Fonts folder is created, if necessary. ■ A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary. ■ A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder. NOTE This option is not available if you're saving a conversion package to an Internet location. Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as external references.
Replace Page Setups Page setups specified in drawings you want to convert can be replaced with a page setup from another drawing. When active, the Page Setups button is made available. Page Setups Opens the Page Setups dialog box where you can select a drawing that contains a page setup to apply to the converted drawings. Conversion Setup Description Enter a description for the conversion setup.
Drawing Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings Displays read-only statistics or general information about your drawing, assigns summary properties, and assigns names and values to custom properties. These custom properties can help you identify your drawing. Summary Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box on page 514.
List of Options The following options are displayed. File Name Shows the file icon and the file name. File Type, Location, Size Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file. MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified, Accessed Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was last modified and last accessed. Attributes Shows system-level file attributes. These values can be modified in Windows Explorer.
Indicates that the file is hidden; you cannot see or use it unless you know its name. System Indicates that the file is a system file. A drawing cannot have the System attribute set. Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings Displays properties such as author, title, and subject that are predefined.
Specifies the title you want to use when searching for this drawing. The title can be different from the drawing file name. Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. You can use the subject name to group drawings that have the same subject. Author Specifies the author of the drawing. The author name can only be entered or changed by the user. To change the author, delete the existing name and enter a new one. Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created. This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable. Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last modified. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system variable. Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the file. Revision Number Displays the revision number. This value is not accessible. To track revisions, create a custom property on the Custom tab.
Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings Assigns custom properties to the drawing. Summary For example, you could create a custom property called Project and assign the actual project name as the value. To assign the same custom properties to a group of drawings, create the custom properties in a drawing template file. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Displays the Add Custom Property dialog box, where you can enter a name and a value for the new custom property. The name must be unique. The value can be left blank. Delete Deletes the custom property that is selected in the list. NOTE If you delete a custom property that is used in a field, the field displays #### the next time it is updated. Add Custom Property Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings Adds a custom property to the drawing file.
E Commands 6 EATTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Edits attributes in a block reference. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Toolbar: Modify II Summary Edits the values, text options, and properties of each attribute in a block. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed. Enhanced Attribute Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute. Summary The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs: ■ Attribute ■ Text Options ■ Properties List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name of the block whose attributes you are editing.
Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can change only the attribute value. List Lists the attributes in the selected block instance and displays the tag, prompt, and value for each attribute. Value Assigns a new value to the selected attribute. Multiple-line attributes include a button with an ellipsis. Click to open the In-Place Text Editor with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler.
Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified). Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects.
Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Boundary Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. Edit PGP Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line Opens the Program Parameters (PGP) text file that defines command abbreviations Access Methods Button Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Edit Aliases. Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Customize, Edit Command Aliases Summary Commands can have abbreviated names called command aliases that you can enter at the Command prompt.
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects. Access Methods Command entry: 'elev for transparent use Summary The ELEV command sets the default Z value for new objects above or below the XY plane of the current UCS. This value is stored in the ELEVATION system variable. NOTE Generally, it is recommended that you leave the elevation set to zero and control the XY plane of the current UCS with the UCS on page 1266 command. ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects.
ELLIPSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Ellipses Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ellipse drop-down ➤ Center Menu: Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Center Toolbar: Draw Summary The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis using the distance from the midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second axis (3). Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse. Arc Creates an elliptical arc.
90.6 degrees are invalid because the ellipse would otherwise appear as a straight line. Multiples of these angle values result in a mirrored effect every 90 degrees. Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify. Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circle. Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase Menu: Modify ➤ Erase Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and click Erase. Summary You can erase selected objects from the drawing. This method does not move objects to the Clipboard, where they can then be pasted to another location. Instead of selecting objects to erase, you can enter an option, such as L to erase the last object drawn, p to erase the previous selection set, or ALL to erase all objects.
Summary The Create Transmittal dialog box is displayed. If you enter -etransmit at the Command prompt, options are displayed. When you select a set of drawing files in a transmittal package, it automatically includes all related dependent files such as xrefs and font files. Create Transmittal Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission Packages a set of files for Internet transmission.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the transmittal package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the transmittal package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the transmittal package. Add File Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the transmittal package.
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission Creates, modifies, and deletes transmittal setups. List of Options The following options are displayed. Transmittal Setups Lists transmittal setups. New Creates a new transmittal setup. New Transmittal Setup Name Enter the name of the new transmittal setup. Based On Select an existing transmittal setup from which the new one will be created.
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission List of Options The following options are displayed. Transmittal Type and Location Specifies the type and path to the transmittal package created.
Specifies the type of transmittal package created. Transmittal Package Type Description Folder Creates a transmittal package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder. Self-Extracting Executable Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the transmittal package and restores the files to the folder location that you specify. Zip Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed ZIP file.
Specifies the method for naming the transmittal package. Displays the default file name for the transmittal package. This option is not available if the transmittal package type is set to Folder. Transmittal File Type Property Description Prompt for a File Name Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the transmittal package. Overwrite if Necessary Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.
This option is not available if you're saving a transmittal package to an Internet location. Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. Place All Files in One Folder All files are installed to a single, specified target folder when the transmittal package is installed. Keep Files and Folders As Is Preserves the folder structure of all files in the transmittal package, facilitating ease of installation on another system.
Purge Drawings Does a complete purge of all the drawings in the transmittal package. NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications when purged items in the drawings have been removed. Include Options Provides a means for including additional options with the transmittal package. Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TTF and SHX) with the transmittal package.
Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission List of Options The following options are displayed. Password for Compressed Transmittal Provides a space for an optional password for the transmittal package. When others attempt to open the transmittal package, they must provide this password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder transmittal packages.
Current Setup Displays the name of the current transmittal setup. Choose Setup Specifies the transmittal setup to use for the transmittal package. EXPLODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) Breaks a compound object into its component objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode Menu: Modify ➤ Explode Toolbar: Modify Summary Explodes a compound object when you want to modify its components separately.
2D Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information. For wide polylines, the resulting lines and arcs are placed along the center of the polyline. 3D Polyline Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment. 3D Solid (AutoCAD drawings) Explodes solids into surfaces and regions. Annotative Objects Explodes the current scale representation into its constituent parts which are no longer . Other scale representations are removed.
EXPORT Quick Reference See also: Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ Export Summary The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. If you do not see the file format that you need in the Files of Type drop-down list, also check the PLOT command for other file types, including PDF.
-EXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files ■ Export FBX Files Creates a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from the command line. Summary The command prompt version of EXPORTDWF, EXPORTDWFX, and EXPORTPDF provides an interface for publishing drawing sheets that can be controlled by a script. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. File Format Select DWF, DWFx, or PDF as the output file type.
Paper Size Enter the paper size or enter ? to view a list of paper sizes defined for the default plotter driver. Paper Units Specify Inches or Millimeters as the paper size unit. NOTE This prompt does not display if you are exporting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, because the size of the plot defaults to pixels. Drawing Orientation Specify if the output displays in portrait or landscape. Plot Scale Specify how to scale the drawing in the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export drop-down ➤ DWF Menu: Application Menu ➤ Export ➤ DWF Summary When you create DWF files with the EXPORTDWF command, you can quickly override the device driver’s page setup options, add a plot stamp, and change file options. You can change these settings in the Save as DWF dialog box. To include layer information, change file location, add password-protection, and other file options, use the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette.
Options Opens the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette where you can change DWF file settings such as file location, password-protection, and layer information. Output Controls Open in Viewer When Done Opens the DWF file in the default viewer after export. Include Plot Stamp Adds user-defined information such as drawing name, date and time, or plot scale in the DWF file. To edit the plot stamp, click the Plot Stamp button to open the Plot Stamp dialog box. Export Selects which part of the drawing to export.
General DWF/PDF options Changes general settings for DWF, DWFx, and PDF files. Location Specifies where the DWF, DWFx, or PDF files are saved when you export drawings. Type Specifies whether to export single sheets or multiple sheets from the drawing. Override Precision Selects a precision preset that offers the best file resolution for your field or creates a new precision preset by selecting Manage Precision Presets. This dpi setting overrides the dpi settings in the DWF, DWFx, or PDF driver.
Page Setup Override Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Allows you to override individual settings when you export a file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF ➤ Page Setup Summary You can override the regular page settings applied to the layout through the Page Setup dialog box. The override settings remain until you exit the application. So, you do not have to reset the overrides every time you export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.
Plot Scale Fit to Paper Select to automatically scale the selection to fit the area on the paper size specified earlier. Scale Specify a scaling ratio for the drawing. This ratio varies depending on whether you select inches or millimeters as the measurement units. Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Preset Lists the preset currently in use. Name The name of the selected preset. Description You can add a description to track presets. Scale Dependent Properties Unit Sets the format for units of measure: Imperial or Metric. Desired Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurments. Non-Scale Dependent Properties Gradient Resolution Sets the resolution for gradients in the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Assign a name for the custom precision preset. Description (Optional) Enter a description for what this preset applies to. Import Precision Preset Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Imports precision presets from an existing sheet set Summary You can import precision presets from an existing sheet set (DSD file). The Select List of Sheets dialog opens (a standard file selection dialog box).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Export Selects which part of the drawing to export to the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. Display Exports objects in the current display. This option is available only in model space. Extents Exports the objects in the drawing extents. This option is available only in model space. Window Exports the objects in the window. This option is available only in model space. Window Selection Button Selects a window area to export from model space.
Creates a DWFx file where you can set individual page setup overrides on a sheet-by-sheet basis. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export drop-down ➤ DWFx Menu: Application Menu ➤ Export ➤ DWFx Summary When you create DWFx files with the EXPORTDWFX command, you can quickly override the device driver’s page setup options, add a plot stamp, and change file options. You can change these settings in the Save as DWFx dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Options Opens the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette where you can change DWFx file settings such as file location, password-protection, and layer information. Output Controls Open in Viewer when Done The DWFx file will open in the default viewer after the export completes when this option is selected. Include Plot Stamp Select to include user-defined information such as drawing name, date and time, or plot scale in the DWFx file.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Save As ➤ Save Layout as a Drawing Shortcut menu: Right-click the layout tab and click Export Layout to Model. Summary Exported objects are duplicated visually in the new drawing and, as a result, they might be trimmed, scaled, copied, or exploded. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is displayed. Select the location and file name for the new exported drawing. All drawings are exported as Drawing (*.dwg).
current drawing. The default file name is the concatenation of the name of the current drawing and the current layout name. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box. However, on the Tools drop-down list, Options is not displayed. EXPORTPDF Quick Reference See also: ■ Export PDF Files Creates a PDF filewhere you can set individual page setup overrides on a sheet-by-sheet basis.
Save as PDF Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Sets file options such as file name and location when you create a PDF file. Summary When you export your drawing to a PDF file, the Save As PDF dialog box is displayed. This dialog box allows you to specify the file name and location, but also allows you to change export, page setup, and plot stamp settings. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Page Setup Override Allows you to override the page settings. EXPORTSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Adjusts the page setup and drawing selection when exporting to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Preview Opens the area you want to export in a preview window. Options Opens the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette. Page Setup Opens the Page Setup Override dialog box.
Creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded. Access Methods Command entry: -exporttoautocad or aectoacad Summary You can create a new version of a drawing file with all proxy AEC objects exploded into basic AutoCAD LT objects. The new version of the drawing loses the intelligence of the custom AEC objects, but the resulting basic objects can be displayed and accessed in earlier versions of AutoCAD LT when object enablers are not available for those versions.
Insert Merges the names of xref-dependent objects into the new drawing without including the original file name. Maintain Determines how blocks within custom AEC objects are treated. Yes Explodes all block instances within custom AEC objects into basic AutoCAD LT objects. The resulting basic objects revert to their original properties rather than the properties of the block definitions. No Does not explode any block instances within custom AEC objects.
Summary To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges...
None Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space are extended. UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space are extended. View Specifies projection along the current view direction.
Edge Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.
EXTERNALREFERENCES Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Opens the External References palette. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Menu: Insert ➤ External References Toolbar: Reference ➤ External References Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the External References palette if the palette is inactive. If the External References palette is active but hidden, executing EXTERNALREFERENCES will open the palette.
Manage external references attached to the current drawing. Summary The External References palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files, such as DWG files (xrefs), DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlays, and raster images. Only DWG, DWF, DWFx, PDF, and raster image files can be opened directly from the External References palette. The External References palette contains several buttons, and is split into two panes.
■ Attach Image. Starts the IMAGEATTACH command. ■ Attach DWF. Starts the DWFATTACH command. ■ Attach DGN. Starts the DGNATTACH command ■ Attach PDF. Starts the PDFATTACH command Refresh/Reload All References Button The following options are available: Refresh Synchronizes the status data of referenced drawing files with the data in memory. Reload All References Updates all file references to ensure that the most current version is used.
List View The listed information includes the reference name, status, file size, file type, creation date and saved path. Reference Name The reference name column always displays the current drawing as the first entry, followed by additional attached files that are listed in the order they were attached. Status The status of the referenced file: ■ Loaded - The referenced file is currently attached to the drawing. ■ Unloaded - The referenced file is marked to be unloaded from the drawing.
File References Pane Shortcut Menus and Function Keys Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings When working in the File References pane, there are several shortcut menus that can be displayed when you right-click on file references or empty areas of the pane. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented under certain conditions.
Menu Item Description Attach DGN Starts the DGNATTACH command. Attach PDF Starts the PDFATTACH command. Bind DGN Starts the -DGNBIND on page 287command. Tooltip Style Modifies the tooltip that appears when you hover over an item in the list view of the palette. Preview/Details Pane Turns the display of the Preview/Details pane off and on. Close Closes the External References palette.
Menu Item Description Reference Status Bind Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box. Only available for referenced DWG files. This is not available for images and underlays. Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.
Status Shows whether the file reference is loaded, unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Size Shows the file size of the selected file reference. The size is not displayed for file references that are unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Type Indicates whether the file reference is an attachment or overlay, the type of image file, a DWF/DWFx underlay, DGN underlay, or PDF underlay. This property cannot be edited.
Preview Pane The preview image is displayed only when a single file reference is selected from the File References pane. There are no other controls for this data pane. When no reference file is selected, the preview pane displays a solid grey field. If there is no preview available, the text “Preview not available” is displayed in the center of the pane. Messaging Field Below the Details / Preview pane is a messaging field that supplies information about certain selected file references.
F Commands 7 FIELD Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Fields in Text Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field Menu: Insert ➤ Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing text in an in-place text editor, and click Insert Field. Summary Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances.
The Field dialog box is displayed. Field Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Fields in Text Inserts a field in the drawing. Summary The options available change based on the selected field category and field name. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects). Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field. Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string (----) if the field value is invalid. The label for this item changes with the field name.
NOTE If the information referenced by sheet set field is not accessible, the value for the field will be displayed as “####.” Options for BlockPlaceholder Fields BlockPlaceholder fields are only available for insertion in the Attribute Definition dialog box when the Block Editor is open. Block Name Displays the name of the current block definition. Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the selected format.
Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the formula. Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC on page 1574 system variable. Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box. Evaluate Updates the value in Preview when you have manually changed the text in Formula.
Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting. FILLET Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Fillets Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
Toolbar: Modify Summary In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero. You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, and xlines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly. Loop Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two possible loops. After selecting a loop edge, you are prompted to Accept the current selection, or choose the Next loop. Undo Reverses the previous action in the command. Polyline Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet.
Select 2D polyline: If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc. Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs. Trim Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects by Properties Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection. List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Property List Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area. Select Filter Adds filter properties to the current filter.
If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and balance them correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation. Logical operators Starting operator Encloses Ending operator Begin AND One or more operands End AND Begin OR One or more operands End OR Begin XOR Two operands End XOR Begin NOT One operand End NOT For example, the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to 1.
Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list. Edit Item Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property. Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter. Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter. Named Filters Displays, saves, and deletes filters. Current Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it current.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text Menu: Edit ➤ Find Toolbar: Text Formatting Shortcut menu: With no commands active, right-click in the drawing area and click Find. Summary The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND Quick Reference See also: ■ Find and Replace Text Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope and results of the search. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Find What Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list.
Zooms to the selected object in the list. You can also zoom to a result when you double-click the selected object. Create Selection Set (Highlighted) Creates a selection set from the objects that contain the text highlighted on the list of results. The selected objects must all be located either in model space or in a single layout. Create Selection Set (All) Creates a selection set from all the objects that contain the text on the list of results.
Ignores hidden items in search results. Hidden items include text on layers that are frozen or turned off, text in block attributes created in invisible mode, and text in visibility states within dynamic blocks. Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half or Full Width Forms Matches half- and full-width characters in search results. Text Types Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default, all options are selected.
8 G Commands GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Summary Define Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 530 Appears only if a geographic location does not exist, and the drawing does not contain a foreign coordinate system.
Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box on page 531 Appears if an alternate coordinate system is found. Define Geographic Location Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Defines a geographic location. List of Options The following options are displayed. Import a .kml or a .kmz File Displays the Import a .kml or .kmz file dialog box. Import the Current Location from Google Earth Retrieves location information from a specific location in Google Earth.
Enables you to edit, redefine, or remove an existing location. List of Options The following options are displayed. Edit Current Geographic Location Displays the Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 532, where you can edit the existing location information. Redefine Geographic Location Displays the Define Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 530, where you can redefine the geographic location. Remove Geographic Location Displays a confirmation dialog box before removing the geographic location.
Geographic Location Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Sets the latitude, longitude, and north direction of a geographic location in a drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Latitude and Longitude Displays or sets latitude, longitude, and direction in decimal values.
Sets the format of the latitude and longitude representation in the drawing. Use Map Displays the Location Picker Dialog Box on page 535. Specifies a location by using the pointing device. The latitude and longitude values are updated when you select a location. If you enter latitude and longitude values, then the map displays the updated location. Latitude Sets the latitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map.
Y Sets the Y component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location. Z Sets the Z component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location. Pick Point Specifies the X, Y, and Z values of the Geographic Location marker based on the World Coordinate System (WCS). Elevation Sets the relative height along the specified up-direction defined for a geographic location. North Direction By default, north is the positive Y direction in the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Location Picker Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Sets the latitude and longitude of the selected location. List of Options The following options are displayed. Map Specifies a location on the map. Region Specifies a region of the world. Nearest City Specifies a city in the selected region. Time Zone Time zones are estimated by reference to the location. You can set the time zone directly (TIMEZONE on page 1684 system variable).
GETENV Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Shows values of specified system registry variables. Summary The values of system registry variables can be displayed with GETENV. Use GETENV to view the registry settings of the MaxArray and MaxHatch registry variables. GETENV is case sensitive, so MaxArray and MaxHatch must be entered exactly as shown. For example, to display the current value for MaxHatch, enter List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Get Link Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Get Link Summary The Get Link dialog box on page 537 is displayed. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions. Get Link Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Generates a URL to the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing.
browser. You can control whether recipients can edit the drawing online or download a local copy. Use this link to allow recipients without AutoCAD WS accounts to view or edit the drawing online. List of Options The following options are displayed. Share Link Generates a link to an online copy of the current drawing. Distribute this link to recipients so they may access the online file. Copy Copies the link to the clipboard. Permissions Defines the access permissions for each recipient. ■ Edit.
GRADIENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Gradient Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient Toolbar: Draw Summary When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 558 is displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546 is displayed. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors.
Access Methods Command entry: 'graphscr for transparent use Summary GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems. GRID Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Adaptive Controls the density of grid lines when zoomed in or out. ■ Adaptive Behavior. Limits the density of grid lines or dots when zoomed out. This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. ■ Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing. If turned on, generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines or dots when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines. Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command.
-GROUP Related procedures: ■ Group Objects Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a group option [?—List Groups on page 542/Order on page 542/Add on page 542/Remove on page 542/Explode on page 542/REName on page 542/Selectable on page 542/Create on page 543] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.
Create Creates a group. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters. GROUPEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Group Objects Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected group.
Add Objects Select objects to add to the current group. Remove Objects Select grouped objects to remove from the current group. Rename Name or rename the current group.
H Commands 9 HATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Toolbar: Draw Summary When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 558 is displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546 is displayed.
NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES on page 1543 system variable. Choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch. ■ Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects. ■ Select objects that enclose an area.
■ Add: Select Objects on page 547 ■ Remove Boundaries on page 548 ■ Recreate Boundary on page 549 ■ View Selections on page 549 ■ Select Boundary Objects on page 549 ■ Options on page 549 ■ Inherit Properties on page 550 ■ Preview on page 550 Add: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu.
Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition. Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. View Selections Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only when a boundary has been defined. Select Boundary Objects Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch object.
Associative Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects. (HPASSOC system variable) Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE system variable) Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill.
Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied. List of Options The following options are displayed. Type and Pattern Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color. Type Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern. Predefined patterns are stored in the aclt.pat or acltiso.pat files supplied with the program.
Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1535 system variable) Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 563. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns. The most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. The Custom Pattern option is available only when Type is set to Custom.
Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option is available only when Type is set to Predefined and Pattern is set to one of the available ISO patterns. Hatch Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Color Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or two-color blend. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade (the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE on page 1518 system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Controls the operation of islands and boundaries. List of Options The following options are displayed. Islands Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Island Detection Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. (HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE on page 1541 system variable) Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable) The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries. Boundary Retention Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch. Retain Boundaries Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary, HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects.
Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for hatch and fills. List of Options The following options are displayed. Boundaries Panel Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill. Remove Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously added .
To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries of the hatch object itself. Thus, when you select a nonassociative hatch, both the control grip and the boundary grips are displayed. Retain Boundary Objects Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch. Don’t Retain Boundaries Does not create a separate object that encloses the hatch object.
Gradient Color 2 is not available. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1535 or GFCLR2 on page 1517 system variables) Transparency Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Select Use Current to use the current object transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1548 system variable) Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch or fill relative to the X axis of the current UCS. Valid values are from 0 to 359.
Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Center Sets the hatch origin at the center of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Use Current Origin Sets the hatch origin to the defaoult location stored in the HPORIGIN on page 1544 system variable.
Outer Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable) Ignore Island Detection Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1541 system variable) No Island Detection Turns off island detection. Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill.
Summary Organizes patterns on four tabs, with images arranged alphabetically on each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK. List of Options The following options are displayed. ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the program. ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the program. Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with the program. Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the Support File Search Path of the program.
-HATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Properties Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply. Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acadlt.pat or acadltiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. ?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acadlt.pat file.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill. Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE. When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter.
Island Detection Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method. Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. +X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no effect.
option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island. Associativity Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC system variable.
Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin. Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE on page 1544 system variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5. Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
HATCHEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Hatches and Fills Modifies an existing hatch or fill. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Hatch Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Hatch Toolbar: Modify II Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Hatch Edit. Summary Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Hatch Edit Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Hatches and Fills Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an existing hatch or fill. Summary The options in the Hatch Edit dialog box are the same as the options for the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 546. Certain options are available only when creating hatches.
Select Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. When you use the Select Objects option, interior objects are not detected automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu.
Remove Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. Recreate Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. Display Boundary Objects Displays the boundary grip controls for the selected hatch that you can use to grip-edit both the boundary and the hatch object. When you select or use the Display Boundary Objects option to select a non-associative hatch, the hatch boundary grips are displayed.
User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path. Hatch Color or Gradient Color 1 Specifies the color for solid fills, hatch patterns, or as the first of two gradient colors. Background Color or Gradient Color 2 Specifies the color for hatch pattern backgrounds or as a second gradient color. When Hatch Type is set to Solid, Gradient Color 2 is not available.
Bottom Right Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Center Sets the hatch origin at the center of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary.
Islands Normal Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION system variable) Outer Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected.
Disassociate Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch or fill. Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects. Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects. Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system. Layer Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer. Transparency Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object transparency setting.
HATCHSETBOUNDARY Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Boundary. Summary Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select hatch object to be trimmed.
Summary Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin for multiple hatches at the same time. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select the hatch object. Select new hatch origin: Click inside the hatch to change the origin point.
HELP Quick Reference See also: ■ Find the Information You Need Displays Help. Access Methods Button Menu: Help ➤ Help Toolbar: Standard Command entry: ? (or 'help for transparent use) Summary Pressing F1 while a tooltip or command is active displays Help for that command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box. HIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide Lines in 3D Objects Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ Hide Menu: View ➤ Hide Summary When you use VPOINT or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing, a wireframe is displayed in the current viewport. All lines are present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the screen.
HIDEOBJECTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Hides selected objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Hide Objects Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Hide Objects. Summary Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are visible. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed.
Access Methods Command entry: Ctrl+Shift+H Summary Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, DesignCenter, and Properties. HLSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects Changes the display properties of hidden lines. Summary The Hidden Line Settings dialog box on page 587 is displayed. Sets the display properties of hidden lines. These settings are visible only when HIDE is used and SHADEMODE is set to 2D Wireframe.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Obscured Lines Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hidden line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype. Linetype Lists the available linetypes to apply to obscured lines. Unlike regular linetypes, obscured linetypes are not affected by zoom level. (OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable) Color Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines.
Display Intersections Specifies the display of intersection polylines. (INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable) Color Lists the available colors to apply to intersection polylines. (INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable) Hide Precision Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be set to either low (single) precision or high (double) precision. (HIDEPRECISION system variable) Low (single) Sets the hide precision to low (single), which uses less memory.
HYPERLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Summary Hyperlinks in a drawing provide jumps to associated files.
After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks. If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, options are displayed, including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink.
Type the File or Web Page Name Specifies the file or web page to associate with the hyperlink. The file can be stored locally, on a network drive, or on an Internet or intranet location. Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files, from which you can select one to link to. Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages, from which you can select one to link to. Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks, from which you can select one to link to.
Displays the path to the file associated with the hyperlink. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected, only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are listed. Use Relative Path for Hyperlink Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this option, the full path to the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink.
E-mail Address Specifies an email address. Subject Specifies a subject for the email. Recently Used E-mail Addresses Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can select one to use for the hyperlink. Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Edits hyperlinks. Summary The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, with one additional option.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects. Select Place in Document Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing. Summmary The named location that you select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Remove/Insert] : Enter an option or pressENTER Remove Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not exist, you are prompted to create one. Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, the hyperlinks that were found are listed at the Command prompt.
Enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink. Enter hyperlink : Enter the full path to a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing Enter a named location for the hyperlink, such as a view in a drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file.
598
I Commands 10 ID Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ ID Point. Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point Toolbar: Inquiry Command entry: 'id for transparent use Summary ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command prompt. If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object. IGESEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export IGES files Saves selected objects in the current drawing to a new IGES (*.igs, *.iges) file.
The following table lists the AutoCAD LT entities tabulated against the corresponding IGES entities they are translated to.
DWG to IGES Conversion Table AutoCAD LT Entity IGES Entity Type Form Mtext Hatch Nothing 110 Block Reference Surface Name 0 Line Treats the block reference as though it was exploded and translates each object within the block separately. 128/144 3D Solid Rational B-spline surface, trimmed surface Treats the 3D solid as though it were exploded to surfaces and translates each surface separately.
IGESIMPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Import IGES Files Imports data from an IGES (*.igs or *.iges) file into the current drawing. Summary Displays the Select IGES File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) to enable you to locate and select the IGES file to import. If import takes longer than 5 seconds, the IGES file is processed in the background and the Import icon is displayed in the status bar. Hence, you can continue to work on the drawing while the IGES file is processed.
IGES to DWG Conversion Table IGES Entity AutoCAD LT Entity Type Form Name 102 0 composite curve Spline 104 0-3 conic arc, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola Spline 106 1 copious data Spline 106 2 copious data Spline 106 11 copious data Spline 106 12 copious data Spline 106 63 closed area Spline 108 0 plane Surface 108 +/- 1 bounded plane Surface 110 0 line Spline 112 0 parametric curve Spline 114 0 parametric surface Surface 116 0 point Nothing 118 0-1 ru
IGES to DWG Conversion Table IGES Entity AutoCAD LT Entity Type Form Name 128 0-9 rational B-spline surface Surface 130 0 offset curve Spline 140 0 offset surface Surface 141 0 boundary entity Nothing 143 0 boundary suface Surface (with trimming applied, not associative) 144 0 trimmed surface Surface (with trimming applied, not associative) Manifold Solid BRep Object (MSBO) Surface (can be converted to solid with CONVTOSOLID) plane surface Applied when processing entity type
IGES to DWG Conversion Table IGES Entity Type Form AutoCAD LT Entity Name 502 vertex list Applied when processing entity type 186. 504 edge list Applied when processing entity type 186. 508 loop Applied when processing entity type 186. 510 face Applied when processing entity type 186. 514 shell Applied when processing entity type 186. IMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Raster Images Displays the External References palette.
Shortcut menu: Select an image. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Image ➤ External References. Summary The External References palette is displayed. If you enter -image at the Command prompt, options are displayed. -IMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Raster Images Attaches a raster image to the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image Reload Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display and plotting. Unload Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached image remains visible. Attach Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
imagename="path name\long file name.bmp" If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing, and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found, the message “Image Not Found” is displayed and the prompt is repeated.
Summary You can change the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade for attached images. To confirm the settings of a selected image, open the Properties palette. NOTE You can also use the ADJUST command to change an image’s brightness, contrast, and fade settings. The Image Adjust dialog box is displayed when you enter the IMAGEADJUST command. If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectlyd the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. If you select a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are the current property settings of the image. If you select multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and 0, respectively. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color.
Summary When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image Dialog Box on page 613 is displayed. After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the underlay through the Image Ribbon Contextual tab.
Path Type Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the image file, or No Path, the name of the image file (the image file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file). Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0. Show Details Displays details about the selected image file. Resolution Displays the number of horizontal and vertical pixels per the current unit measurement in AutoCAD LT.
List of Options The following options are diaplayed. Adjust Panel Brightness Controls the brightness and the contrast of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image. Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image fades. Fade Controls the fading of an image. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Image contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping Boundary. Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Image ➤ Clip. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME system variable.
New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected IMAGE underlay after the old boundary is deleted. Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself.
Summary The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing. NOTE Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. High Produces a high-quality display of the image. Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.
In Files of type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file name to import. The file is imported into the drawing. The following formats are available for import: ■ FBX files (*.fbx): Autodesk® FBX files (see FBXIMPORT) ■ Metafile (*.wmf): Microsoft Windows Metafile (see WMFIN on page 1335) ■ MicroStation DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN files (see DGNIMPORT on page 298) ■ All DGN files (*.*): DGN files with user-specified file extensions such as .
Summary The Insert dialog box is displayed. If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed. A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block. With either method, blocks are standardized and accessible to multiple users.
Summary The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS. Name Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Locate Using Geographic Data Inserts drawing using geographic data as the reference. Specifies if the current and attached drawing contain geographic data.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Scale Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device. Input Scale Factor Allows you to manually enter a scale factor for the block. X Sets the X scale factor. Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units. Explode Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only. Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype.
You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name prompt by following the listed examples. ■ Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk (*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block definition is not added to the drawing. ■ Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name, INSERT searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition by that name.
■ Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale. Basepoint Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for the block reference. Scale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object Toolbar: Insert Summary The Insert Object dialog box is displayed. ■ Linked information from another document can be updated when it changes in the source document. ■ Embedded information from another document is not updated when it changes in the source document. Insert Object Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import OLE Objects Inserts a linked or embedded object. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you select a file to link or embed. Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it. Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information. INTERSECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Creates a 2D region from selected overlapping regions.
ISOLATEOBJECTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects. Summary Displays selected objects in the current view. All other objects are temporarily hidden. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed.
ISOPLANE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Isometric Grid and Snap Specifies the current isometric plane. Access Methods Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use Summary The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE.
Top Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
632
J Commands 11 JOIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Break and Join Objects Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Surface Modeling tab ➤ Curves panel ➤ Join Menu: Modify ➤ Join Toolbar: Modify Summary Combines a series of finite linear and open curved objects at their common endpoints to create a single 2D or 3D object.
NOTE Construction lines, rays, and closed objects cannot be joined. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select source object or multiple objects to join as once: Select lines, polylines, 3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, or splines. Source Object Specifies a single source object to which you can join other objects. Press Enter after selecting the source object to begin selecting the objects to join.
Helix Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source helix. All objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single spline. Spline Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source spline. All objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single spline. Multiple Objects to Join at Once Joins multiple objects without specifying a source object.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text objects, and attribute objects.
638
L Commands 12 LAYCUR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Changes the layer property of selected objects to the current layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Change to Current Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Change to Current Layer Toolbar: Layers II Summary If you find objects that were created on the wrong layer, you can quickly change them to be on the current layer. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to be changed to the current layer: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you are finished N object(s) changed to layer X (the current layer). LAYDEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Deletes all objects on a layer and purges the layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Delete Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete Summary This command also changes block definitions that use the layer to be deleted.
Delete Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays layers available for deletion. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layers to Delete Displays a list of layers that you can delete. Press Shift or Ctrl to select more than one layer. Layers that cannot be deleted include the current layer, layer 0, locked layers, and xref-dependent layers.
LAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity ■ CLASSICLAYER on page 209 Manages layers and layer properties. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: 'layer for transparent use Summary The Layer Properties Manager is displayed. If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer. Layer Properties Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers ■ CLASSICLAYER on page 209 Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Property Filter Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you can create a layer filter based on one or more properties of the layers. New Group Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter. Layer States Manager Displays the Layer States Manager on page 668, in which you can save the current property settings for layers in a named layer state and then restore those settings later.
Search for Layer Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not saved when you close the Layer Properties Manager. Status Line Shows the name of the current filter, the number of layers displayed in the list view, and the number of layers in the drawing. Invert Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter. Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use.
The Hide/Show Layer Filters button controls the display of the Layer Filters pane of the Layer Properties Manager. When the Layer Filter pane is collapsed, the Layer Filter button is displayed adjacent to Layer Filter status text. The Layer Filter button gives you access to the filters when the full Layer Filter pane is closed. If there are xrefs attached to the drawing, an xref node displays the names of all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref.
Viewport In the current layout viewport, controls the VP Freeze setting of the layers in the selected layer filter. This option is not available for model space viewports. ■ Freeze: Sets VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport, objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer. ■ Thaw: Clears VP Freeze for layers in the filter.
Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select objects in the drawing. This option is available only when a layer group filter is selected. ■ Add: Adds the layers of the selected objects to the layer group filter that is selected in the tree view. ■ Replace: Replaces the layers of the selected layer group filter with the layers of the objects that are selected in the drawing.
Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking the linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box. Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. Clicking the lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box. Transparency Controls the visibility of all objects on the selected layer. When transparency is applied to individual objects, the objects’ transparency property overrides the transparency setting of the layer.
VP Plot Style (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the plot style associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. Override settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted when the visual style in the drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot set a plot style override. Description (Optional) Describes the layer or the layer filter.
Layer Shortcut Menu Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view. Clear this option to hide the tree view. Show Filters in Layer List Displays filters at the top of the list view. The filters are listed in alphabetical order. Clear the check mark to display only layers in the list view. Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer name immediately.
VP Thaw Layer in All Viewports Thaws the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view. Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most recently selected layer or filter. Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the current layer. Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items that are currently selected.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Name Provides a space to enter a name for the layer properties filter. Show Example Displays the examples of layer property filter definitions in “Layer Filter Examples”. Filter Definition Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define the filter. For example, you can define a filter that displays all layers that are either red or blue and in use.
VP Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box. VP Transparency Click the field to display the Layer Transparency dialog box. VP Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box. Filter Preview Displays the results of the filter as you define it. The filter preview shows which layers will be displayed in the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager when you select this filter.
Example 2 The filter named “RYW” displays layers that meet all of the following criteria: ■ Are on ■ Are frozen ■ Are red or yellow or white Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box | 655
Select Linetype Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers Displays linetypes available in the current drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.
Displays the lineweight values available. Summary You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Displays the available lineweights to be applied. Available lineweights consist of fixed values that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a lineweight to apply it. Original Displays the previous lineweight.
Layer Transparency Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers Sets the transparency level for the selected layer(s) in the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Summary Select or enter a transparency level to apply to selected layers in the current drawing.
Summary Click on the Layer Properties Manager on page 643. Controls when notification occurs for new layers and if layer filters are applied to the Layers toolbar; also controls the background color of viewport overrides in the Layer Properties Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. New Layer Notification Controls the evaluation and notification of new layers based on the LAYEREVAL settings in the DWG file.
NOTE There should be no filter (Unreconciled Layer filter) displayed when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. If one is currently displayed, it will be turned off. You can set the unreconciled new layers filter active and select the layers in that filter. With the unreconciled layer selected, you can right-click and click Reconcile Layer. Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing Checks for new layers that have been added to the drawing.
Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the PLOT command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 1) Isolate Layer Settings Setting for layers not isolated: Lock and Fade Selects Lock and Fade as isolation method. Off Sets non-selected layers to Off. Off Sets non-selected layers to Off (in paper space). VP Freeze Sets non-selected layers to Viewport Freeze (in paper space).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Check the Columns you want to Display Lists all columns that display depending on whether the Layer Properties Manager was accessed from Model space or a layout tab. Checked columns are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager. Move Up Moves the checked layer to the left in the Layer Properties Manager. Move Down Moves the checked layer to the right in the Layer Properties Manager. Select All Checks all columns in the list.
-LAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Manages layers and layer properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current layer: <"current"> Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/Rename/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/TRansparency on page 664/MATerial/Plot/PStyle/Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte/Description/rEconcile]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
Rename Renames an existing layer. On Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting. Off Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting. Color Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color.
Plot Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted. Pstyle Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in the User's Guide.
Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file, or layers states from a file (DWG, DWS, DWT) into the current drawing. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file. Description Sets the description property value of the existing layer. A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with an existing description.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Previous Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous Summary When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using either the Layer control, Layer Properties Manager, or -LAYER command. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone by Layer Previous. LAYERPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.
Saves, restores, and manages named layer states. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Toolbar: Layers Summary The Layer States Manager on page 668 is displayed. Saves the layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state. Named layer states can then be restored, edited, imported, and exported for use in other drawings.
Summary Displays a list of saved layer states in the drawing. You can create, rename, edit, and delete layer states. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layer States Lists the named layer states that have been saved in the drawing, the space in which they were saved (model space, layout, or xref), whether the layer list is the same as in the drawing, and an optional description. Don’t List Layer States in Xrefs Controls whether layer states in xrefs are displayed.
Displays the Edit Layer State dialog box on page 672, where you can modify a selected named layer state. Rename Allows in-place editing of the layer state name. Delete Removes the selected named layer state. Import Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can load a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into the current drawing. Layer states in files (DWG, DWS, or DWT) can be imported. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file.
More Options Controls the display of additional options in the Layer States Manager dialog box. Layer Properties to Restore Restores the selected layer settings and properties to their previously saved state. The Visibility in Current Viewport option is available only for layout viewports, while the On/Off and Frozen/Thawed options are available only for Model space viewports. Select All Selects all the settings. Clear All Removes selection from all the settings.
(Optional) Provides a description of the layer state that is displayed in the Layer States Manager. Edit Layer State Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States Summary Modifies the selected layer state. Displays all the layers and their properties that are saved in the selected layer state except for viewport override properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layer List Displays a list of layers in the selected layer state and their properties.
Displays the Select Layers to Add to Layer States dialog box on page 673, in which you can add layers from the current drawing that are not defined in the layer state. Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States Summary Displays layers by name and includes descriptions that are not defined in the selected named layer state. Multiple layers can be selected.
Select Layer States Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import and Export Layer States Displays a list of layer states to be imported from a drawing file into the current drawing. List of Option The following option is available in this dialog box. Check Layer States to Import Displays a list of layer states, the space (model tab or layout tab) in which the layer state was saved, and a description.
NOTE If the layer state to be imported contains linetypes or plot styles that do not exist in the current drawing, they are imported from the DWG, DWS or DWT file. LAYFRZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Freezes the layer of selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Freeze Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Freeze Toolbar: Layers II Summary Objects on frozen layers are invisible.
Settings Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Viewports Displays settings for viewports. In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] : Enter f to freeze objects in all viewports or v to freeze an object in the current viewport only Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions. ■ Block.
Summary All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
LAYLCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Prevent Objects from Being Selected Locks the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Lock Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock Toolbar: Layers II Summary Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being accidentally modified. You can also fade the objects on a locked layer using the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Match Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match Toolbar: Layers II Summary If you enter -laymch at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 680. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name by entering a name. Destination Layer list Displays a list of layers in the drawing. -LAYMCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Toolbar: Layers Summary You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layer Properties Manager. LAYMRG Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing.
Summary You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them. Objects on merged layers are moved to the target layer, and the original layers are purged from the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Merge to Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays a list of layers onto which the selected layers or objects can be merged. List of Options The following options are displayed. Target Layer Displays the first layer in an alphabetical list of the layers in the current drawing. Target Layer list Displays an alphabetical list of the layers onto which you can merge the selected layers or objects.
Select Object on Layer to Merge Select an object on the destination layer. Name Displays a list of layers, where you can select layers to merge. Select Object on Target Layer Select an object on the target layer. Name Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer. LAYOFF Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Turns off the layer of a selected object.
Select an object on the layer to be turned off or [Settings/Undo]: Select an object, enter s, or enter u Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off. Settings Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types. Returns the following prompt: ■ Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ On Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Turn All Layers On Toolbar: Layers II Summary All layers that were previously turned off are turned back on. Objects created on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also frozen. LAYOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) Creates and modifies drawing layouts.
NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is inserted before the copied layout tab. Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default. The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the Model tab, you must select all geometry and use the ERASE command. New Creates a new layout tab.
?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing. LAYOUTWIZARD Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Page Setups Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Create Layout Wizard Summary The Layout wizard is displayed.
When you've finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within the new layout. LAYTHW Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Thaws all layers in the drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Thaw Menu: Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Thaw All Layers Summary All layers that were previously frozen are unfrozen.
LAYULK Quick Reference See also: ■ Prevent Objects from Being Selected Unlocks the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unlock Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unlock Toolbar: Layers II Summary When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is displayed. You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected and modified.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unisolate Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate Toolbar: Layers II Summary Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained. LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the LAYISO command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used are retained when you enter the LAYUNISO command.
Summary Isolates the layer of a selected object in the current viewport by freezing the layer in all but the current viewport. You can choose to isolate all layouts or only the current layout. This command automates the process of using VP Freeze in the Layer Properties Manager. You select an object on each layer to be frozen in other layout viewports. NOTE LAYVPI works only when TILEMODE is set to 0 and when two or more paper space viewports are defined.
LAYWALK Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays objects on selected layers and hides objects on all other layers. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Walk Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Walk Toolbar: Layers II Summary The LayerWalk dialog box is displayed. Displays a dialog box with a list of all layers in the drawing. For drawings with a large number of layers, you can filter the list of layers that are displayed in the dialog box.
Dynamically displays objects on layers that you select in the Layer list. Summary The number of layers in the drawing are displayed in the dialog box title. You can change the current layer state when you exit, save layer states, and purge layers that are not referenced. You can use the Layer Walk dialog box in a paper space viewport to select layers to turn on and thaw in the layer table and the current viewport. Any layer that is not selected in the Layer list is frozen in the current viewport.
Layer List Shortcut Menu Options Displays a list of options for the layers selected in the Layer list. Hold Selection Turns on the Always Show option for selected layers. An asterisk (*) is displayed to the left of each layer held. Release Selection Turns off the Always Show option for selected layers. Release All Turns off the Always Show option for all layers. Select All Selects and displays all layers. Clear All Clears all layers.
click Select Unreferenced. In the Layer list, the unreferenced layers are highlighted. You can purge those layers. Restore on Exit Returns layers to their previous state when you exit the dialog box. If the check box is cleared, any changes you made are saved. LEADER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Leaders ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.
If you press Enter at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, the following options are displayed: Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see TOLERANCE). You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.
The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is displayed. The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. The text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box. If the offset specified is negative, the multiline text is enclosed in a box as a basic dimension.
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen Summary You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment. Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle. Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle.
Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed. LIMITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named layout. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits Command entry: 'limits for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits. Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking. LINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Lines Creates straight line segments.
Summary With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment is a line object that can be edited separately. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point: Specify a point or press Enter to continue from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line.
Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence. Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. LINETYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Linetypes Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use Summary The Linetype Manager is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Linetype Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Linetypes Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype. List of Options The following options are displayed. Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list.
Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acadlt.lin file and add them to the linetype list. Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype.
Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area. Details Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings. Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports.
Summary The acadlt.lin file contains the standard linetypes. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Button Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different linetype (LIN) file. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. Available Linetypes Displays the linetypes available to load.
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in the file are listed. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
the linetype is neither loaded nor in acadlt.lin, the program displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects inherit the linetype of the block.
■ The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero. ■ Elevation (Z coordinate information). ■ Extrusion direction (UCS coordinates), if the extrusion direction differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS. ■ Additional information related to the specific object type. For example, for dimensional constraint objects, LIST displays the constraint type (annotation or dynamic), reference type (yes or no), name, expression, and value.
Writes the contents of the command history to a file. Summary The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF command. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 841 command.
LWEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Lineweights Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use Summary The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Summary For a table of valid lineweights, see “Overview of Lineweights” in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting.
Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If this option is selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable. Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This option does not affect how objects are plotted.
Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ? The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER, BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches. Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default.
M Commands 13 MANAGEUPLOADS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Manages the uploading of files stored on the AutoCAD WS server. Access Methods Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Upload panel ➤ Manage Uploads Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Manage Uploads Summary The Manage Uploads dialog box on page 718 is displayed. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.
Manage Uploads Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Manages the uploading of files stored on the AutoCAD WS server. Summary View the status of your current file uploads and control whether drawings are automatically uploaded each time the local drawing is saved. Use the check boxes to resume or stop the uploading process for a specific drawing. To remove a file from the list, right-click the file and click Remove from This List.
MARKUP Quick Reference See also: ■ View Markups Opens the Markup Set Manager. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Summary When submitting designs for review, you can publish a drawing as a DWF or DWFx file. The reviewer can open the file in Autodesk Design Review, mark it up, and then send the file back to you. Opens the Markup Set Manager.
Summary You can show or hide markups and their originating drawing files in your drawing area. You can change the status of individual markups and add notes and comments to them. List of Options The following options are displayed. Markup Set List Control The Markup Set List control displays the name of the markup set, or, if no markup sets are open, the Open option. Names of Open Markup Sets Lists all open markup sets, if any. A check is displayed next to the current markup set.
created that contains any changes you made to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups. View Redline Geometry Displays or hides redline markup geometry in the drawing area. View DWG Geometry Displays or hides the originating drawing file in the drawing area. View DWF Geometry Displays or hides the DWF or DWFx file geometry in the drawing area. Markups Displays loaded markup sets. Any sheets that were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk Design Review are listed in italics.
NOTE When opening a digitally signed DWFx file, a message box is displayed that warns you about saving a new version of the file will invalidate the attached digital signature. Close Markup DWF Closes the selected marked-up DWF or DWFx and removes it from the Markup Set Manager. Save Markup History Changes Saves changes to the status of markups and added comments to the marked-up DWF or DWFx file. NOTE Saving a DWFx file that contains a digital signature will invalidate the attached digital signature.
■ For Review: After you have implemented a markup, you can change the status to For Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the changes to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup. ■ Done: After a markup has been implemented and reviewed, you can change its status to Done. Restore Initial Markup View If you panned or zoomed the selected markup, or rotated the view in model space, restores the original view of the selected markup.
Markup Preview Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing sheet or markup. Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup Details area, which provides information about the selected node in the Markups area. You can click the Preview button to change the area back to the Markup Preview area. Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup Preview area and displays a thumbnail image of the selected drawing sheet or markup.
MARKUPCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Respond to Markups Closes the Markup Set Manager. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Summary The Markup Set Manager window closes. MASSPROP Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Calculates the mass properties of regions or AutoCAD 3D solids.
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Toolbar: Inquiry Summary Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region or mass properties computed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first selected region are accepted.
Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Centroid A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point. If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the additional properties shown in the following table are displayed.
3D Solids The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids. Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Mass The measure of inertia of a body. Because a density of one is used, mass and volume have the same value. Volume The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses. Bounding box The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid. Centroid A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. A solid of uniform density is assumed.
Calculations Based on the Current UCS The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which mass properties are calculated.
Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want to copy Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the source cell, and right-click or press Enter or Esc to exit MATCHPROP Quick Reference See also: ■ Copy Properties Between Objects Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.
Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box, in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default, all object properties are selected for copying. Property Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Copy Properties Between Objects Specifies the properties that are copied from the select source object to the destination objects. Summary Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects.
Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object.
In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline.
MEASURE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Measured Intervals on Objects Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Measure Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure Summary The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object to measure: Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object. Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn). Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle.
After you specify the segment length, the block is inserted at the specified interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included. MEASUREGEOM Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points.
Information displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip in the current units format. Distance Measures the distance between specified points. The following display at the Command prompt and in the tooltip: ■ The current UCS X axis ■ Distance in X direction (Delta X) ■ Distance in Y direction (Delta Y) Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move the cursor and displays in the tooltip.
■ Total area of all defined areas and objects ■ Total perimeter of all defined areas and objects Subtract Area Subtracts a specified area from the total area. The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip. Volume Measures the volume of an object or a defined area. Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area. You can select 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height for that object.
Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment. Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. ■ Endpoint of Arc on page 955 Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option. MESSAGES Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Displays messages from your AutoCAD WS account.
MIRROR Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror Toolbar: Modify Summary You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half. NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not changed.
Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press Enter Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader Toolbar: Multileader Summary A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first, leader landing first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style.
Leader Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line. ■ Straight. ■ Spline. ■ None. Leader Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line ■ Yes. ■ No. If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object. Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be used for the multileader. ■ Block on page 744 ■ Mtext on page 744 ■ None on page 744 Block Specifies a block within your drawing to associate with the new multileader.
Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line. ■ Enter second angle constraint. ■ None. MLEADERALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Align Toolbar: Multileader Summary After multileaders have been selected, specify the multileader to which all others are aligned.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select multileader to align to or [Options on page 746]: Options Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders. Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify collected multileader location on page 747 or [Vertical on page 747/Horizontal on page 747/Wrap on page 747] Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection. Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns. Horizontal Places the multileader collection in one or more rows. Wrap Specifies a width for a wrapped multileader collection.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Add Leader Toolbar: Multileader Pointing device: Hover over Landing grip and choose Add Leader; hover over leader endpoint grip and choose Remove Leader List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader arrowhead location on page 748 or [Remove Leader on page 748] Add Leader Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object.
MLEADERSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Creates and modifies multileader styles. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Toolbar: Multileader, Styles ➤ Multileader Style Summary The Multileader Style Manager is displayed.
Summary Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles. The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Multileader Style Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you create. The default multileader style is Standard.
New Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define new multileader styles. Modify Displays the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can modify multileader styles. Delete Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted. Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Modifies an existing multileader style.
Summary Controls the general appearance of the multileader. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed. ■ Leader Format Tab on page 752 ■ Leader Structure Tab on page 753 ■ Content Tab on page 754 Leader Format Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader.
Lineweight Determines the lineweight of the leader line. Arrowhead Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads. Symbol Sets the arrowhead symbol for the multileader. Size Displays and sets the size of arrowheads. Leader Break Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader. Break Size Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the multileader is selected.
Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line. Landing Settings Controls the landing settings of the multileader. Automatically Include Landing Attaches a horizontal landing line to the multileader content. Set Landing Distance Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line. Scale Controls the scaling of the multileader. Annotative Specifies that the multileader is annotative.
MText: Text Options Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader. Default Text Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the MTEXT In Place Editor. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box where you can create or modify text styles. Text Angle Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. Text Color Specifies the color of the multileader text. Text Height Specifies the height of the multileader text.
Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the right of the leader. Right Attachment Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the left of the leader. Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text. Extend Leader to Text Extends the landing line to end at the edge of the text line where the leader is attached, not at the edge of the multiline text box.
Color Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color included in the block is set to ByBlock. Scale Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a 1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a 1/2 inch square.
MODEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Model Space and Paper Space Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout. Access Methods When a viewing a layout, enter model at the command prompt or click the Model tab below the drawing window. Summary On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model layout automatically sets the TILEMODE on page 1684 system variable to 1, and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing.
Menu: Modify ➤ Move Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move. Right-click in the drawing area and click Move. Summary Use coordinates, grid snaps, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with precision. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Standard List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. All Reverses all previous actions. Last Reverses only the last action. MSLIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Slides Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout. Summary The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
When you view slides of images shaded with the SHADE command in a larger window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when creating slides. MSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Model Space and Paper Space In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport.
Access Methods Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object. Summary Displays either the multiline text tab on the ribbon or the In-Place Text Editor to modify the formatting or content of the selected mtext object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed. MTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Creates a multiline text object.
If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text editor and displays additional Command prompts. See also: ■ Symbols and Special Characters on page 791 In-Place Text Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects.
The In-Place Text Editor includes ■ Text Formatting toolbar on page 768 ■ Paragraph dialog box on page 778 ■ Column Settings dialog box on page 780 ■ Background Mask dialog box on page 781 ■ Columns menu on page 779 ■ Options menu When a table cell is selected for editing, the In-Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers. NOTE Not all options available when creating single-line text. List of Options The following options are displayed.
The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black characters are inserted and the background color is black, the editor automatically changes to white or the current color. NOTE A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet imported into a drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet was created in Microsoft Office 2002 with Service Pack 2 installed.
as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}). ■ Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after the letter, number, or bullet character was created by Tab, not Space.
characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string.
Dictionaries Displays the Dictionaries dialog box, where you can change the dictionary that is checked against any found misspelled words. Text Highlight Color Specifies the highlight color when text is selected. Text Formatting Toolbar Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Formats the text of the current multiline text object. Summary Controls the text style for a multiline text object and character and paragraph formatting for selected text.
A sample drawing (TrueType.dwg) showing each font is provided in the sample directory. Annotative Turns Annotative on or off for the current mtext object. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in theTEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights. Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text.
You can also select tabs from the ruler. Clicking the Tab Selection button changes tab styles from left, center, right, and decimal. Once you make your selection, you adjust the corresponding tab in the ruler or in the Paragraph dialog box. OK Closes the editor and saves any changes that you made. Options Displays a list of additional text options. See Text Editor Shortcut Menu on page 764.
the line space will be determined by the largest text height value in that line. ■ At least: Takes both the user specified arbitrary value and the text height to determine spacing. If text height is smaller than the arbitrary value the line space is determined by the user specified value. If the text height is larger, the line spacing is equal to the text height value. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in releases before AutoCAD LT 2008.
■ Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with (1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing Tab, and (4) some text before the line is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter.
Text Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Creates or modifies multiline text objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Style Panel Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text style is active by default Annotative Turns Annotative on or off for the current mtext object. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD LT compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box. (Not available for table cells.
■ Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from the selected or current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to the mtext space setting. Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box: ■ Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user specifies. Changing text height will not affect line spacing. ■ Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you specify spacing according to text height.
■ Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence. ■ Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in the text. Columns Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See Columns menu on page 779.
Options Panel Undo Undoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redo Redoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Ruler Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end of the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays height and column grips when column mode is active. You can also select tabs from the ruler.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Tab Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler. Decimal style Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with the drawing even if the locale setting is changed.
Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns. Summary You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns. You can edit column width and height with grip-editing. To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Type Displays choices for the type of columns you want to create. Column Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Height Displays mtext height when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected. Width Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter value is five times the default mtext text height. Also displays the total width value of the mtext object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Use Background Mask Puts an opaque background behind the text. NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred to as gutters will be unmasked. Border Offset Factor Specifies the margin around the text for the opaque background. The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from the MTEXT shortcut menu List of Options The following options are displayed. Find What Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find. Replace With Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace the text you typed in Find What. Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What.
Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half/Full Width Forms (East Asian Languages) Matches half- and full-width characters in search results. Stack Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text. Summary To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu.
Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction. Appearance Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction. Style Specifies a style format for stacked text: horizontal fraction, diagonal fraction, tolerance, and decimal. Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a horizontal line.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack. List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character.
Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on. NOTE Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format. Don't Show This Dialog Again; Always Use These Settings Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. The current property settings are used for all stacked text.
The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is annotative. The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise, it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE on page 1683 system variable. Character height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in TEXTSIZE on page 1683. Justify Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in relation to the text boundary.
Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line.
Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary. ■ Specify rotation angle.
Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object. The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN system variable. Symbols and Special Characters Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text You can include special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string.
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Angle \U+2220 Boundary line \U+E100 Centerline \U+2104 Delta \U+0394 Electrical phase \U+0278 Flow line \U+E101 Identity \U+2261 Initial length \U+E200 Monument line \U+E102 Not equal \U+2260 Ohm \U+2126 Omega \U+03A9 Plate/property line \U+214A 792 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Subscript 2 \U+2082 Squared \U+00B2 Cubed \U+00B3 These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts: ■ Simplex* ■ Romans* ■ gdt* ■ amgdt* ■ Isocp ■ Isocp2 ■ Isocp3 ■ Isoct ■ Isoct2 ■ Isoct3 ■ Isocpeur (TTF only)* ■ Isocpeur italic (TTF only) ■ Isocteur (TTF only) ■ Isocteur italic (TTF only) * These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions.
MULTIPLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line Repeats the next command until canceled. Summary The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time. MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes. MVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports Creates and controls layout viewports.
Corner of Viewport Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport. On Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to make another one active. Off Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed in an inactive viewport.
Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport. For a description of the options for creating arc segments, see the Arc option in PLINE. Close Closes the boundary. If you press Enter after specifying at least three points, the boundary is closed automatically. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment.
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. 3 Divides the specified area into three viewports. The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed.
■ First Corner on page 797 ■ Fit on page 797 798 | Chapter 13 M Commands
N Commands 14 NAVBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Navigation Bar Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. Access Methods Ribbon: View Tab ➤ Windows Panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Navigation Bar Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Navigation Bar Summary Provides access to the ViewCube tool, SteeringWheels, 3Dconnexion, and product-specific navigation tools. Use these tools to navigate or reorient your model.
Off Hides the navigation bar. 3Dconnexion Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views Controls the settings of 3Dconnexion navigation tools. Summary Controls the settings for 3Dconnexion navigation tools which are available from the navigation bar. Customize the speed and movements of the 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to manipulate the current view.
NAVSWHEEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of SteeringWheel Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ SteeringWheels Shortcut menu: SteeringWheels Summary Selecting a tool on the wheel is different from the selection of a typical command. Press on a wedge and drag to use the desired navigation tool. Release the mouse button to return to the wheel and switch navigation tools.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy Nested Objects Summary Instead of exploding or binding an xref, block, or DGN underlay to be able to copy objects nested within them, you can copy the selected objects directly into the current drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current location. Multiple Controls whether multiple copies are created automatically as you specify additional locations. Array Arranges a specified number of copies in a linear array using the first and second copy as the spacing distance.
Menu: File ➤ New Summary The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the STARTUP system variable. ■ 1: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box. ■ 0: NEW displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch. Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the imperial measurement system. The default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 12 by 9 inches. Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 429 by 297 millimeters. Tip Displays a description of the selected measurement setting. Use a Template Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file.
Select a Template Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file location, which is specified in the Options dialog box. Select a file to use as a starting point for your new drawing. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected file. Browse Displays the Select a Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), where you can access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list.
Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units and area for your new drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale. Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area for your new drawing. The Advanced Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.
List of Options The following options are displayed. The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. Units Indicates the format in which you enter and in which the program displays coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available.
Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers expressed in the form of the product of a decimal number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10). Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command, this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area.
Summary List of Options The following options are displayed. The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure, Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.
Other Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or south. Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0 angle. Angle Direction Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which the program displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise. Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on.
NEWSHEETSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Sheet Set Creates a new sheet set data file that manages drawing layouts, file paths, and project data. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Menu: File ➤ New Sheet Set ➤ New ➤ Sheet Set Summary The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new sheet set.
O Commands 15 OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Annotation Scale Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects. The Annotative Object Scale dialog box on page 814 is displayed. If you enter -objectscale at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 816. Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected object. List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object.
Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. Add Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box on page 815. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list. NOTE The current scale or scales referenced by objects or views cannot be deleted. Add Scales to Object Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Adds a new scale to the selected object. List of Options The following option is displayed.
Use the SCALELISTEDIT on page 1098 command to add custom scales to this list. -OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add on page 816/Delete on page 816/? on page 816] : Enter a or d or press Enter Add Adds an annotation scale to the selected objects.
OFFSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset Menu: Modify ➤ Offset Toolbar: Modify Summary You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create drawings containing many parallel lines and curves. The OFFSET command repeats for convenience.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Erase source = current Layer = current OFFSETGAPTYPE = current Specify Offset Distance on page 818 or [Through on page 818/Erase on page 818/Layer on page 819] : Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object. Exit Exits the OFFSET command.
Layer Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the layer of the source object. OLELINKS Quick Reference See also: ■ Link OLE Objects in Drawings Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ OLE Links Summary The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the drawing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is not displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Links Lists information about linked objects. The information listed depends on the type of link. To change information for a linked object, select the object. Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type of object. Type Displays the format type. Update: Automatic Updates the link automatically whenever the source changes. Update: Manual Prompts you to update a link when you open the document. Update Now Updates the selected links.
Convert Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Link OLE Objects in Drawings Specifies a different source application for an embedded object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click an embedded object and click OLE ➤ Convert. List of Options The following options are displayed, Current Type Displays the type of object you are converting or activating. Object Type Displays a list of available object types.
Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. This option is available only if you select Display as Icon. Result Describes the result of the selected options. Change Icon Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Link OLE Objects in Drawings Changes the icon that represents an embedded or linked object in a drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Icon Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object. Current Specifies the currently selected icon.
Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select an icon from a file. OLESCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit OLE Objects in Drawings Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With an OLE object selected, right-click and click Text Size. Summary The OLE Text Size dialog box is displayed. NOTE You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command.
Summary The OLE object is scaled automatically to accommodate the size of the text. List of Options The following options are displayed. OLE Font Displays a list of the fonts used in the OLE object. OLE Point Size Displays a list of the point sizes available for the selected font. Text Height Sets a text height for the font at the selected point size. Reset Restores the OLE object to its size when it was inserted in the drawing.
Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Online Drawings Summary The Drawings section in AutoCAD WS displays your uploaded files and any files that have been shared with you. Use the Drawings section to manage your files and folders, and to edit, share, and download files. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions. OOPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Restores erased objects.
OPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Opens an existing drawing file. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Menu: File ➤ Open Toolbar: Standard ➤ Open ➤ Drawing Summary The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Places List Provides quick access to predefined locations. Reorder the icons in the Places list by dragging them to a new position. To add a new icon to Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes. History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed from the dialog box. It is recommended that you periodically remove unwanted shortcuts from the History list.
Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop. Buzzsaw Provides access to Buzzsaw projects. Buzzsaw is a secure Internet-based collaboration and project management service that connects project teams in different locations. To use Buzzsaw, you must already have a project hosting account on Buzzsaw or be given access to a subscriber's Buzzsaw site.
Views Controls the appearance of the Files list or Folders list and, for a Files list, specifies whether to show a preview image when a file is selected. List Displays a multi-column list. Details Displays a single-column list with file details. Thumbnail Displays each file in a thumbnail view. Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. To save a bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.
Files List Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type. Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Details view. Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Preview in the dialog box. To save a bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box. File Name Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list.
Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Creates, renames, modifies, and deletes Buzzsaw location shortcuts. List of Options The following options are displayed. Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Lists the location of existing Buzzsaw shortcuts. New Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box. Rename Renames the shortcuts you select. Modify Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box, where you can change settings for the selected shortcut.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Buzzsaw Site Specifies the location of the most recently used Buzzsaw site. Enter any existing address or site name. Buzzsaw User Name Specifies the user name you use for the Buzzsaw site you want to access. Password Specifies your password for the Buzzsaw site. Save Login Name and Password Saves your user and login name so that you don't need to retype it the next time you access the site.
Summary Provides access to a new Autodesk Buzzsaw location that you specify. You can open drawings or save drawings at this location. If a sheet set is open, the Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your current sheet set. The only Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated with the current sheet set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Buzzsaw Site Displays the name of the current Buzzsaw site.
Find Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Search Paths and File Locations Searches for files using name, location, and date modified filters. Summary To access the Find dialog box, in a standard file selection dialog box, click Tools menu ➤ Find. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name & Location Tab Filters the file search based on file type, file name, and location. Named Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the search.
Use the following wild-card characters to broaden your search: ■ * (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string. ■ ? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on. The type of files to include in the search is determined by Type, so you don't need to enter a file extension in Named. For example, to find house102.dwg, enter house* and set Type to Drawing (*.dwg). Type Specifies the type of files to include in the search.
■ During the Previous N Days: Searches for files created or modified within a specified number of days. Find Now Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs. Stop Ends the search. New Search Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options. OK When one or more files are selected in the search results, closes the Find dialog box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection dialog box. Search Results Lists all files found by the search.
Summary To browse the sites that you add, select FTP from the Places list in the standard file selection dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name of FTP Site Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com). Log On As Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific user name. Anonymous Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user.
Add Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard file selection dialog box. Modify Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name, logon name, and password. Remove Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the standard file selection dialog box. FTP Sites Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file selection dialog boxes. URL Displays the URL for the selected FTP site.
OPENDWFMARKUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Respond to Markups Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Load Markup Set Summary Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups to load into the Markup Set Manager.
Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Open Online Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Open Online Toolbar: Online Summary If the drawing has never been uploaded to AutoCAD WS, or if the latest version is not available in your online storage, the drawing and any supporting files are automatically uploaded. You must save the drawing before you can continue with this command. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS.
OPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Customizes the program settings. Access Methods Menu: Application menu ➤ Options Menu: Tools ➤ Options Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Options. Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, and click Options. Summary The Options dialog box is displayed. Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Customizes the program settings.
icon, and affects all drawings in a work session. Options that are saved in the registry are saved in the current profile. Current Drawing Displays the name of the current drawing above the tabs.
Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can specify a new location for the folder or file selected in the list. Support File Search Path Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts, customization files, plug-ins, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder.
Custom Dictionary File Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. (DCTCUST system variable) Alternate Font File Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. (FONTALT system variable) If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed, from which you can choose an available font. Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
Plot Style Table Search Path Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb extension, or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and color-dependent plot style tables). Automatic Save File Location Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the Open and Save tab. (SAVEFILEPATH system variable) Color Book Locations Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors in the Select Color dialog box.
Actions Recording File Location Specifies the path used to store new action macros. (ACTRECPATH system variable) Additional Actions Reading File Locations Specifies the additional paths to use when locating available action macros for playback. (ACTPATH system variable) Plot and Publish Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish tab.
Move Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path. Set Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current. Display Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Customizes the display.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Window Elements Controls display settings specific to the drawing environment. Color scheme Controls color settings in a dark or light color for elements such as the status bar, title bar, ribbon bar, and the application menu frame. Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area. Display Drawing Status Bar Displays the drawing status bar, which displays several tools for scaling annotations.
Show rollover Tooltips Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. (ROLLOVERTIPS on page 1646 system variable) Colors Displays the Color Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify colors of elements in the main application window. Fonts Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify the font for the command window text. Layout Elements Controls options for existing and new layouts.
(CURSORSIZE system variable) Display Resolution Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to improve display quality, the impact on performance is significant. Arc and Circle Smoothness Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. (VIEWRES command) Segments in a Polyline Curve Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
Controls options that relate to opening and saving files. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Save Controls settings related to saving a file. Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE, SAVEAS, QSAVE, SHAREWITHSEEK on page 1118 and WBLOCK. The file format selected for this option becomes the default format for saving drawings. NOTE AutoCAD LT 2004 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD LT 2004, AutoCAD LT 2005, and AutoCAD LT 2006 releases.
Annotative objects may have multiple . Annotative objects are decomposed and scale representations are saved to separate layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a number. NOTE Enabling Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects only impacts drawings saved to a legacy drawing file format (AutoCAD LT 2007 and earlier). Maintain Drawing Size Compatibility Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
Maintain a Log File Writes the contents of the text window to a log file. (LOGFILEMODE on page 1571 system variable, see also LOGFILEPATH and LOGFILENAME) File Extension for Temporary Files Specifies a unique extension for temporary save files. The default extension is .ac$. Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file.
■ Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves performance. Select the Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when working with clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index. When this option is selected, other users cannot edit the file while it is being referenced. ■ Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of the referenced drawing. Other users can edit the original drawing. Retain Changes to Xref Layers Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Default Plot Settings For New Drawings Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format. Use As Default Output Device Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format.
Add or Configure Plotters Displays the Plotter Manager (a Windows system window). You can add or configure a plotter with the Plotter Manager. Plot To File Specifies the default location for plot to file operations. Background Processing Options Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. You can use background plotting to start a job you are plotting or publishing and immediately return to work on your drawing while your job is plotted or published as you work.
■ Full file path ■ Selected layout name ■ Page setup name ■ Named page setup path ■ Device name ■ Paper size name ■ Final status Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log Specifies that a log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved. Save One Continuous Plot Log Specifies that a single log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved.
If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size, the program displays a warning message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer. Use the Plot Device Paper Size Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer.
Specify Plot Offset Relative To Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. (PLOTOFFSET system variable). Printable Area Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the printable area. Edge of Paper Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the edge of the paper. Plot Stamp Settings Opens the Plot Stamp dialog box. Plot Style Table Settings Opens the Plot Style Table Settings dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Controls settings that relate to configuration of the graphics display system. Performance Settings Current Pointing Device Controls options that relate to the pointing device. Current Pointing Device Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers. ■ Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system pointing device as current. ■ Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab-compatible digitizer as current.
User Name Changes the user name with the Windows login information. This name is inserted when you use the time and date stamp (REVDATE) and is useful if different people work on the same drawing. Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. General Options Hidden Messages Settings Controls the display of previously hidden messages. Displays the Hidden Message Settings dialog box on page 889.
Specifies whether information is accessed from the Autodesk website, or from locally installed files. When online, the latest Help information and other online resources are accessible. Offline Help Browser Specifies whether to use Microsoft® Internet Explorer® or your default Web browser for viewing Help. InfoCenter Balloon Notifications Controls the content, frequency, and duration of balloon notifications in the upper-right corner of the application window.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Windows Standard Behavior Controls keystroke and right-click behavior. Double-click Editing Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. (DBLCLKEDIT system variable) Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. (SHORTCUTMENU system variable) If this option is cleared, right-click is interpreted as Enter.
Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog box. This dialog box provides further definition for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option. (SHORTCUTMENU system variable) Insertion Scale Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing. Source Content Units Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. (INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable) If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted.
Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps, except in scripts. (OSNAPCOORD system variable = 2) Associative Dimensioning Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy-style, nonassociative dimension objects are created. Make New Dimensions Associative Creates associative dimensions, which automatically adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them are modified.
Default Scale List Displays the Default Scale List dialog box to manage the default list of scales displayed in several dialog boxes associated with layout viewports and plotting. You can delete all custom scales and restore the default list of scales. Drafting Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Sets options for several editing features, including AutoSnap and AutoTrack. List of Options The following options are displayed.
AutoSnap Settings Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press Tab to cycle through all the snap points available for that object. Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The marker is a geometric symbol that is displayed when the crosshairs move over a snap point. (AUTOSNAP system variable) Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off.
AutoTrack Settings ™ Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS). Display Polar Tracking Vector Displays a vector along specified angles when polar tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees.
Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference Sets options for selecting objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pickbox Size Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. (PICKBOX system variable) The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in editing commands. Selection Modes Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. (PICKFIRST system variable) Many but not all editing and inquiry commands support noun/verb selection. Use Shift to Add to Selection Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. (PICKADD system variable) To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing.
Determines the limit of the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes. (PROPOBJLIMIT system variable) Selection Preview Highlights objects as the pickbox cursor rolls over them. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable) When a Command Is Active Displays selection previewing only when a command is active and the Select Objects prompt is displayed.
Show Grip Tips Displays grip-specific tips when the cursor hovers over a grip on a custom object that supports grip tips. This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS system variable) Show Dynamic Grip Menu Controls the display of dynamic menu when pausing over a multi-functional grip. (GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL on page 1526 system variable) Allow Ctrl-cycling Behavior Allows the Ctrl-cycling behavior for multi-functional grips.
Grip Colors Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Sets the color properties of the grip. List of Options The following options are displayed. Settings Controls the color settings of the grip. Unselected Grip Color Controls the color of unselected grips. (GRIPCOLOR on page 1524 system variable) Selected Grip Color Controls the color of selected grips.
(GRIPHOVER on page 1525 system variable) Grip Contour Color Controls the color of the grip contour. (GRIPCONTOUR on page 1524 system variable) Alternate Font Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Application Fonts Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file.
Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all SHX fonts in the Fonts folder. Font Style Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. If the missing font is a Big Font, this option changes to Big Font and lists all available Asian-language Big Font files. Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Sets the display colors of the interface elements for each context in the application.
Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, Display tab Summary A context is an operating environment such as model space. An interface element is an item that is visible in that context such as the crosshairs pointer or the background color. List of Options The following options are displayed. Context A context is an environment such as model space. Interface elements can have different colors assigned depending on the context. The context you select displays a list of associated elements.
Restores all interface elements back to their default color settings. Restore Classic Colors Restores only the interface elements of 2D model space back to the AutoCAD 2008 classic color settings. Preview Displays a preview of the drawing based on defined settings. Command Line Window Font Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Application Fonts Sets the font displayed in the Command window.
Font Lists the system fonts available for selection. Font Style Lists the styles available to apply to the current font. Size Lists the font sizes available for the current font. Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls whether thumbnail previews are updated when the drawing is saved. Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, Open and Save tab List of Options The following options are displayed.
Sheets and Views Generate Sheet, Sheet View and Model View Thumbnails Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts. (UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable) Sheet thumbnails are displayed on the Sheet List tab, sheet view thumbnails on the View List tab, and model space view thumbnails on the Resource Drawings tab. Performance-Accuracy Slider Specifies when thumbnails are updated and which thumbnails are updated.
Default Plot Style Behavior for New Drawings Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. A plot style is a collection of property settings defined in a plot style table and applied when the drawing is plotted. Changing the default plot style setting by using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing.
Specifies the default plot style table to attach to new drawings. A plot style table is a file with a .ctb or an .stb extension that includes and defines plot styles. If you are using color-dependent plot styles, this option lists all color dependent plot style tables found in the search path as well as the value of None. If you are using named plot styles, this option lists all named plot styles tables.
Summary If you are accustomed to using the right-click method for Enter while a command is active, you might prefer to disable Command shortcut menus from this dialog box. You can also control shortcut menus by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable. List of Options The following options are displayed. Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut menu.
Disables the Command shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing area when a command is in pro-gress is the same as pressing Enter. Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled Enables the Command shortcut menu. Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present Enables the Command shortcut menu only when command options are available at the Command prompt. If no options are available, a right-click is the same as pressing Enter.
Regen Automatically updates fields when the file is regenerated. Visual Effect Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls the appearance of selection previewing. Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab List of Options The following options are displayed. Selection Preview Effect Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable) Preview Area Displays the effect of the current settings.
■ Both. Displays thickened, dashed lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over an object. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable = 2) Advanced Options Displays the Advanced Preview Options dialog box. Selection Area Effect Controls the appearance of selection areas during selection preview. Preview Area Displays the effect of the current settings. Indicate Selection Area Controls the display of effects for selection areas.
Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab List of Options The following options are available in this dialog box. Contextual Tab Display Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. (RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT on page 1641 system variable) Do Not Switch To Contextual Tab on Selection When an object or selection set is single- or double-clicked, focus is not automatically switched to ribbon contextual tabs.
Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Allows you to turn selection cycling on and off and configure selection cycling display options. Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, Selection tab Summary Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. (PREVIEWFILTER system variable) List of Options The following options are displayed. Exclude Objects on Locked Layers Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
Multiline Text Excludes multiline text objects from selection previewing. This option is off by default. ( PREVIEWFILTER system variable) Hatches Excludes hatch objects from selection previewing. This option is off by default. ( PREVIEWFILTER system variable) Transparency Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls transparency for dockable windows. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the title bar on the dockable window and click Transparency.
Click to Preview Preview the palette mouse-over transparency value when the button is held down. The palette returns to the default transparency set when the button is released. Apply these settings to all palettes Sets the degree of transparency for the palette and mouse-over for all palettes. (APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES on page 1384 system variable) Disable all window transparency (global) Disables transparency for all palettes.
InfoCenter Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of InfoCenter and Autodesk Exchange Provides options for controlling the content and duration of balloon notifications that display in the upper-right corner of the application window. Access Methods Pointing device: Options dialog box, System tab List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable Balloon Notification for These Sources Controls whether the balloon notification feature is turned on or off.
Did You Know messages provide Knowledge Base information and general instructional messages. Click the text or the Expand icon to view the detailed information. Use Balloon Notification Display Time Displays the balloon message for the number of seconds that you specify below. Number of Seconds Balloon Notification Displays Specify the length of time that the balloon displays before automatically closing.
If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Displays the Add Scale dialog box. Edit Displays the Edit Scale dialog box. NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales. Move Up Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list up one position. Move Down Moves the currently selected scale in the scale list down one position. Delete Removes all unreferenced scales from the scale list and leaves the referenced scale when multiple scales are selected.
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Ortho Command entry: F8 Command entry: 'ortho for transparent use Summary In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is specified. Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS.
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Osnap Shortcut menu: Press Shift while right-clicking in the drawing area and choose Osnap Settings. Command entry: F3 Command entry: 'osnap for transparent use Summary The Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
OVERKILL Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects Menu: Modify ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects Toolbar: Modify II ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects Summary Displays the Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box on page 896. Removes redundant geometry.
Delete Duplicate Objects Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes duplicate geometry as well as overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones. List of Prompts Object Comparison Settings Tolerance Controls the precision with which OVERKILL makes numeric comparisons. If this value is 0, the two objects being compared must match before OVERKILL modifies or deletes one of them.
Linetype Object linetypes are ignored. Linetype Scale Object linetype scale is ignored. Lineweight Object lineweight is ignored. Thickness Object thickness is ignored. Transparency Object transparency is ignored. Plot style Object plot style is ignored. Material Object material is ignored. Options Use these settings to control how OVERKILL deals with lines, arcs, and polylines. Optimize segments within polylines When selected, individual line and arc segments within selected polylines are examined.
-OVERKILL Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes duplicate or overlapping lines, arcs, and polylines. Also, combines partially overlapping or contiguous ones. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Tolerance Defines the value within which OVERKILL makes numeric comparisons for determining object duplication. Optimize Polylines Optimize segments within plines [segment wiDth/Break polyline/Yes/No] : ■ Segment Width: ignore polyline segment width ■ Break Polyline: maintains polylines when optimizing polyline segments ■ Yes: Enabled by default. Honors polylines as discreet objects and deletes non-polyline objects that overlap polylines.
900
P Commands 16 PAGESETUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Menu: File ➤ Page Setup Manager Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model layout or a named (paper space) layout and click Page Setup Manager. Summary The Page Setup Manager is displayed.
A page setup is a collection of plot device and other settings that determine the appearance and format of your final output. These settings are stored in the drawing file and can be modified and applied to other layouts. Page Setup Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Specifies the page setup for the current layout. Summary You can also create named page setups, modify existing ones, or import page setups from other drawings.
Page Setups Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups from other drawings. Current Page Setup Displays the page setup that is applied to the current layout. Page Setup List Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout. The list includes the named page setups and layouts that are available in the drawing.
Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Display When Creating a New Layout Specifies that the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when a new layout tab is selected or a new layout is created.
New Page Setup Name Specifies the name for the new page setup. Start With Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup. When you click OK, the Page Setup dialog box is displayed with the settings of the selected page setup, which you can modify as necessary. Specifies that no page setup is used as a starting point. The default settings that are displayed in the Page Setup dialog box can be modified.
Summary The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases: ■ When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager ■ When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed. Page Setup Name Displays the name of the current page setup.
Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Partial Preview Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area. The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area. Paper Size Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device.
View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command. Window Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify. When you specify the two corners of the area to plot, the Window button becomes available. Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values.
Scale Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units. NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT. Inch(es) =/mm =/Pixel(s) = Specifies the number of inches, millimeters, or pixels equal to the specified number of units. Inch/mm/pixel Specifies inches or mm for display of units.
Controls whether the properties of plot styles assigned to objects are displayed on the screen. Shaded Viewport Options Specifies how shaded viewports are plotted and determines their resolution levels and dots per inch (dpi). Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting for a viewport on a layout tab, select the viewport and then, on the Tools menu, click Properties.
NOTE Shaded viewport plotting of rendered views is not supported. Plot Options Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, plot styles, shaded plots, and the order in which objects are plotted. Plot Object Lineweights Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted. Plot Transparency Specifies whether object transparency is plotted. This option should only be used when plotting drawings with transparent objects.
Plot Upside-Down Orients and plots the drawing upside-down. Icon Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper. NOTE The orientation of plots is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable. Preview Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper by executing the PREVIEW command.
Summary You can cancel your changes, click OK to overwrite the PC3 file, or specify a new file name for the modified PC3 file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Save Changes to the Following File Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify a new file name. Import Page Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Displays the page setups in the selected drawing that are available to import.
Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup. Plotter Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Plot Size Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
Summary You can pan the drawing display in real time. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu. If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays command prompts, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display. Position the cursor at the start location and press the mouse button down. Drag the cursor to the new location.
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location. To stop panning at any time, press Enter or Esc. -PAN Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Moves the view planar to the screen by specifying a distance and direction the view should be moveed in. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or while another ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress. Pan Shortcut Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Pan and Zoom shortcut menu allows for switching between navigation tools and cancelling the current navigation tool. To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is active. List of Options The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels PAN or ZOOM. Pan Switches to PAN.
Opens the Parameters Manager palette that includes all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager Menu: Parametric ➤ Parameters Manager Toolbar: Parametric Summary The Parameters Manager palette displays relevant parametric information based on whether you access it from within the drawing or from within the Block Editor.
The Parameters Manager palette includes a grid control with three columns, by default. You can also add two columns (Description, Type) using the shortcut menu. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Delete a Dimensional Variable When you delete a dimension variable: ■ The associated dimensional constraint in the drawing is removed. ■ The variables retain the value calculated by the expression as a constant. This action is for variables referenced by other variables, and ensures that the geometry does not change. Filtering the Display of Variables You can filter the display of variables to do the following: ■ Display All Parameters- Displays all associative variables. No filter is applied.
Searching a Parameter An edit box allows you to search for parameters by name. Highlighting Dimensional Constraints When you select a dimensional constraint in the Parameters Manager palette, the associated object is highlighted in the drawing. If the parameter is a dynamic constraint that is hidden, the dynamic constraint will be temporarily displayed and highlighted when you select the cell.
Column Description Type Displays the dimensional constraint type or variable value Order Controls the order properties are displayed in the Properties palette Show Displays the parameter as a property of the block reference Description Displays the comments or notes associated with the user variable The Type column affects the formatting of the parameter in the Parameters Manager and Properties palette. It also affects the value of the parameter when the block is scaled.
The parameters for the block definition are organized in the following categories: ■ Action Parameters ■ Dimensional Constraint Parameters ■ Reference Parameters ■ User Parameters ■ Attributes You can only add user parameters to the table. When you delete any item from the table, the item is automatically deleted from the block definition. Edit a Dimensional Variable You can edit the dimensional variable name and expression. To do so: ■ Double-click the name or expression box.
■ Display Parameters Used in Expressions - Displays all variables that contain expressions to evaluate a value, and variables contained in expressions. Sorting a Column The sort order is not affected when you change a cell value. Searching a Parameter An edit box in the upper-right corner of the Parameters Manager allows you to search for parameters by name.
PARAMETERSCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks Closes the Parameters Manager palette. PASTEASHYPERLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Creates a hyperlink to a file, and associates it with a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Hyperlink Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Hyperlink Summary First, select a document, such as a text, spreadsheet, drawing, or image file, and copy it to the Clipboard.
PASTEBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing as a block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Block Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Block Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area and click Clipboard ➤ Paste as Block Summary The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing as a block at the specified insertion point.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste Menu: Edit ➤ Paste Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area, and click Clipboard ➤ Paste Command entry: Ctrl+V Summary If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text (mtext) object using the MTEXT defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object. All other objects, except AutoCAD LT objects, are inserted as embedded or linked (OLE) objects.
Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing using the original coordinates. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates Menu: Edit ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area, and click Clipboard ➤ Paste to Original Coordinates Summary The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the current drawing at the same coordinates used in the original drawing.
Summary The Paste Special dialog box is displayed. Paste Special Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard Sets file formats and linking options for data pasted from the Clipboard. Summary You can either embed file data or link file data. Linked data is updated when you open the drawing. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats.
Paste Link Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. If the source application supports an OLE or data link, a link is created to the original file. As Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. Display as Icon Inserts a picture of the application icon instead of the data. To view or edit the data, double-click the icon.
PDFADJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a PDF underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: PDF Underlay contextual tab ➤ Adjust panel Summary If you select a single PDF underlay, the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome are the current property settings of the selected underlay.
Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more. If the background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest linework displaying in black.
-PDFATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Attach a PDF underlay from the command line. Summary When you attach a PDF file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. TIP You can drag a PDF file onto the drawing window to start the PDFATTACH command. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected PDF underlay and the scale factor units. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected PDF file. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected PDF underlay. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
Show Details Found In Displays the path to the PDF file. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the PDF file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting. PDF Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Underlays Displays options for editing PDF underlays. List of Options The following options are displayed. Summary When you select a PDF underlay, the PDF Contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon.
Options Panel Show Underlay Hides or displays the underlay. Enable Snap Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in the underlay. External References (EXTERNALREFERENCES on page 504) Opens the External References palette. PDF Layers Panel Edit Layers (ULAYERS on page 1281) Controls the display of layers in a DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay. PDFCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip Underlays Crops the display of a selected PDF underlay to a specified boundary.
TIP Use the generic CLIP on page 211 command to clip images, external references, viewports, and underlays. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. On Turns on clipping and displays the PDF underlay clipped to the previously defined boundary. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire PDF underlay and frame. If you re-clip the PDF underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on.
PDFLAYERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay Controls the display of layers in a PDF underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Underlay Layers Shortcut menu: Select a PDF underlay. Right-click in the drawing area and click PDF Layers. Summary When you select a PDF underlay, the PDF Underlay ribbon contextual tab on page 936 displays. From the contextual tab, you can click Edit Layers or enter PDFLAYERS.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Polyline Toolbar: Modify II Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Polyline Edit. Summary Common uses for PEDIT include joining 2D polylines, converting lines and arcs into 2D polylines, and converting polylines into curves that approximate B-splines (spline-fit polylines). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The PLINECONVERTMODE on page 1613 system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT on page 1607system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline. The conversion in both PEDIT and SPLINEDIT will obey the DELOBJ on page 1433 system variable. Multiple Selection (PEDIT) Quick Reference Enables selection for more than one object.
If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS. Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it using the Close option. Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option.
Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex. Move Moves the marked vertex. Regen Regenerates the polyline. Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is straightened if it is an arc. Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Spline Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. Quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines can be generated.
■ DIVIDE, MEASURE, and the Object option of AREA and HATCH see only the fit spline, not the frame. ■ STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched. The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline.
depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session. 3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) Quick Reference If you select a 3D polyline, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. ■ Previous on page 948 ■ Previous on page 943 Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the polyline is truncated.
Spline Curve Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points. The SPLFRAME system variable controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B-spline, whose curves can be approximated only by line segments. Negative values for spline segments are ignored. Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests.
Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Groups panel ➤ Named Groups Menu: Tools ➤ Group Manager Toolbar: Group Summary Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements that you need to manipulate as a unit. List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Displays the names of existing groups. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_), but not spaces.
Details Displays the Group Manager—Details dialog box. This dialog box lists any group names you have created under Group. Select a name to display the number of objects in the group and the group description. Select Group Selects all objects in the specified group. To select objects in a group, select the group name under Group and click Select Group. NOTE When the PICKADD system variable is set to 1, you can add and remove objects from the current group selection set.
Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS. UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display.
PLINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Polylines Creates a 2D polyline, a single object that is composed of line and arc segments. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polyline Menu: Draw ➤ Polyline Toolbar: Draw Summary A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. NOTE A temporary plus-shaped marker displays at the first point.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point Current line-width is Specify next point on page 954 or [Arc on page 955/Close on page 959/Halfwidth on page 959/Length on page 960/Undo on page 960/Width on page 960]: Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number creates clockwise arc segments. Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Center Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2) Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3) Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Line Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts. Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment. Specify length of line: Specify a distance Undo Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.
PLOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Plot Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Plot Menu: File ➤ Plot Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot Summary The Plot dialog box is displayed. Click OK to begin plotting with the current settings. If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Summary You can display more options by clicking the More Options button. List of Options The following options are displayed. Page Setup Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing. You can base the current page setup on a named page setup saved in the drawing, or you can create a new named page setup based on the current settings in the Plot dialog box by clicking Add. Name Displays the name of the current page setup.
If the selected plotter doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed and you can select the plotter's default paper size or a custom paper size. Name Lists the available PC3 files or system printers from which you can select to plot the current layout. An icon in front of the device name identifies it as a PC3 file or a system printer. ■ PC3 file icon: Indicates a PC3 file. ■ System printer icon: Indicates a system printer.
If the Plot to File option is turned on, when you click OK in the Plot dialog box, the Plot to File dialog box (a standard file navigation dialog box) is displayed. Partial Preview Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area. The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area. Paper Size Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device.
Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When plotting from the Model tab, plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option. Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the current space is plotted.
Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper. This option is not available when Plot Area is set to Layout. X Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option. Y Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option. Plot Scale Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout.
Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale. Preview Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted by starting the PREVIEW command. To exit the preview and return to the Plot dialog box, press ESC, press ENTER, or right-click and then click Exit on the shortcut menu. Apply to Layout Saves the current Plot dialog box settings to the current layout.
Shaded Viewport Options Specifies how shaded viewports are plotted and determines their resolution level and dots per inch (dpi). Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting for a viewport on a layout tab, select the viewport and then, on the Tools menu, click Properties. From the Model tab, you can select from the following options: ■ As Displayed. Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen. ■ Legacy Wireframe.
■ Preview: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi. ■ Normal: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi. ■ Presentation: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution, to a maximum of 600 dpi. ■ Maximum: Sets shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution with no maximum.
Plot with Plot Styles Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are plotted. When you select this option, Plot Object Lineweights is automatically selected also. Plot Paperspace Last Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide Paperspace Objects Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab.
Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Plot Upside-Down Orients and plots the drawing upside down. Icon Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper. NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Page Setup Name Specifies a name for the new page setup. You can modify the new named page setup later through the Page Setup Manager. Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration (PC3) file. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Cancel Sheet Cancels the plot of the sheet currently being processed. Cancel Job Cancels the plot job. Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Displays the device driver name that is stored in the PC3 file. Summary A device can be a plotter or printer.
specified in the original PC3 file, the following configuration information may change when the PC3 file is saved: ■ Plot quality ■ Color depth ■ Resolution ■ Media source ■ Media destination ■ Media finishing options (such as folding or binding) ■ Any custom settings of the previous device or driver If the plotter or printer you select can't support the paper size specified in the layout, the default paper size is used.
-PLOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file in the command line. If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Detailed plot configuration [Yes on page 975/No on page 975] : Enter y or n or press ENTER No Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot.
PC3 file is found, the program searches for a Windows system printer with that device name. Enter paper size or [?] : Specify the paper size to use for the plot or enter ? to view the actual list of paper sizes defined for the plotter driver You must specify a paper size exactly as it is defined by the plotter driver.
Enter plot scale (Plotted Inches = Drawing Units) or [Fit] : Specify the scale of the plot Plotted Inches = Drawing Units Calculates the plot scale based on the inches or millimeters to drawing units that you specify. You can also enter a real number as a fraction (for example, you can enter 1=2 or .5). Fit Calculates the scale to fit the area on the sheet of paper. The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you modified and saved the setting.
Hidden Specifies that a model space view is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of display. Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] : Enter y if you want to write the plotted drawing to a file, or press Enter to plot to an output device If you specify Yes, the following prompt is displayed: Enter file name:
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. Summary The Plot Stamp dialog box is displayed. NOTE Plot stamp will always be drawn with pen number 7, or the highest numbered available pen if the plotter does not hold seven pens. You must install a suitable pen in that position. If you are using a non-pen (raster) device, color 7 is always used for plot stamping. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Login Name Includes the user login name in the plot stamp information. Device Name Includes the current plotting device name in the plot stamp information. Paper Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp information. Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information. Preview Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box.
Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) in which you can specify the location of the parameter file you want to use. Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file. Advanced Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, in which you can set the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can also create a log file, and set its location.
Deletes the selected user-defined field. Advanced Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects Determines the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. Access Methods Command entry: plotstamp Summary You can also create a log file and set its location. The dialog box is displayed when you choose the Advanced button in the Plot Stamp dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
X Offset Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value positions the plot stamp information beyond the printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off.
Two sets of values for the plot stamp size and location are saved in the PSS file: one for the dimensionless file formats and the other for dimensional file formats. If the units you select in the dialog box are dimensional, then the dimensional values are displayed and modified. To access the dimensionless values, you need to select pixels as the unit of measurement. Regardless of the units selected in the dialog box, the correct set of values is applied at plot time.
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt. You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp information for a drawing. LIst of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Enter stamp location [TL/TR/BL/BR] : ■ TL: Top Left ■ TR: Top Right ■ BL: Bottom Left ■ BR: Bottom Right Text orientation indicates the rotation angle of the plot stamp in relation to the page. Enter text orientation [Horizontal/Vertical] : ■ Horizontal: Plot stamp will be horizontal relative to the page. ■ Vertical: Plot stamp will be vertical relative to the page. Stamp upside-down [Yes/No] : Specify plot stamp offset <0.1000,0.
PLOTSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and can be assigned to objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Menu: Format ➤ Plot Style ➤ Print ➤ Edit Plot Style Tables Summary To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use named plot styles. ■ If a drawing is in Color-Dependent mode, you can convert it to use named plot styles using the CONVERTPSTYLES command.
Current Plot Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Specifies the plot style for new objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Plot Style Displays the current plot style. Plot Style List Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to an object, including the default plot style, NORMAL.
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, in which you modify the plot styles in the plot style table. Attached To Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached to. Select Plot Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Specifies the plot style to be assigned. List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Styles Displays the available plot styles, including the default plot style, NORMAL.
Original Displays the originally assigned plot style. New Displays the new plot style to be assigned. Active Plot Style Table Sets the plot style table attached to the current drawing. A plot style table defines plot styles. Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Editor. Attached To Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached to.
PLOTTERMANAGER Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Manage Plotters Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Manage Plotters Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager Summary In the folder, you can start the Add-a-Plotter wizard, or double-click a PC3 file to open the Plotter Configuration Editor.
Adds new plotters and printers. The wizard produces a PC3 file that you can edit in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Your configurations are stored in the Plotters folder. Plotter Configuration Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Modifies a PC3 file's plotter port connections and output settings, including media, graphics, physical pen configuration, custom properties, initialization strings, calibration, and user-defined paper sizes.
Configuration Search Path file. Under Printer Configuration Search Path, click the path name to view the location of your plotter files.) ■ Choose Edit Plotter Configuration from within the Add-a-Plotter wizard. ■ Choose Properties in the Page Setup dialog box. ■ Choose Properties in the Plot dialog box. Depending on your configured plotting device, additional options may be available on the Device and Document Settings tab.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plotter Configuration File Name Displays the file name you assigned in the Add-a-Plotter wizard. Description Displays information you want to include about the plotter.
Ports Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Changes communication settings between the configured plotter and your computer or network system. You can specify whether you want to plot through a port, plot to a file, or use AutoSpool. See “Use AutoSpool” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. If you plot through a parallel port, you can specify the timeout value.
Plot to File Sends the drawing to the file specified in the Plot dialog box. AutoSpool Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing. AutoSpool is specified on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. Port List Displays a list and description of available ports, both local and network. If the port is a network port, the name of the network printer is also displayed. Show All Ports Shows all available ports on the computer regardless of the ports available on the plotter.
NOTE Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the tree view. In addition, you might not be able to edit some settings if the device handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesn't support the capability. List of Options The following options are displayed. Media Node Specifies a paper source, size, type, and destination. Available settings depend on the supported features of your configured plotter.
■ Printable Bounds: Displays the print boundaries. Media Type Displays a list of the media types supported by the plotter configuration. Duplex Printing Determines double-sided printing and binding margin. Binding margin options are available only for plotters that support duplex printing. ■ None: Indicates no double-sided printing. ■ Short Side: Places the binding margin on the short side of the paper. ■ Long Side: Places the binding margin on the long side of the paper.
you can reduce the time needed to change pens by selecting Adds Pen Sorting. Every object that uses a particular pen will be plotted before switching to another pen. Each method in the list includes the optimization methods preceding it in the list (except for No Optimization). Physical Pen Characteristics To plot your drawing correctly on a pen plotter, you need to provide information about the pens in your plotter. For each pen in your plotter, specify a color and width.
amounts of installed RAM, you can provide that information to improve performance. Installed Memory Provides the program with the amount of total memory (RAM) installed on a nonsystem plotter. This option is only available for nonWindows system printers that accept optional memory. If your plotter has extra memory, specify the total amount of memory. ■ Total Installed Memory: Specifies the total installed memory in megabytes.
Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory and plotting speed. ■ OLE: Specifies a position on the slider that balances output quality with memory use and plotting speed when plotting OLE objects. Position the slider at None to disable OLE object printing. Degrading the image quality lets you plot in less time. Position the slider at Best for the best output at the expense of memory and plotting speed.
For some drivers, such as ePlot, this is the only tree view option that is displayed. For Windows system printers, most of the device-specific settings are made in this dialog box. For more information about the custom properties settings for your device, choose Help in the Custom Properties dialog box.
Termination Restores the printer to its original state after plotting. Specify a termination ASCII text string that is sent to the plotter after plotting is complete. Use a back slash followed by a three-digit number (taken from the ASCII table), for example, \027, to specify binary (unprintable) characters such as the escape character. User-Defined Paper Sizes & Calibration Node Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file, calibrates the plotter, and adds, deletes, revises, or filters custom paper sizes.
NOTE For Windows system printers, you can change the paper size settings and create custom paper sizes only in the Custom Properties dialog box. Modify Standard Paper Sizes Adjusts the printable area for standard paper sizes to match the printer's capabilities. (You can't create custom paper sizes for Windows system printers using the Plotter Configuration Editor.) ■ List of Standard Paper Sizes: Displays the available set of standard paper sizes. ■ Modify: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard.
■ Save PMP: Saves a PMP file to a new file in the AutoCAD LT 2012\drv folder. ■ Detach: Detaches the PMP file associated with the PC3 file you are editing. Import Imports file information from earlier versions of the program. If you have a PCP or PC2 file from an earlier version, you can import some of the information in those files into a PC3 file. PC3 files store plotter name, port information, pen optimization level, paper size, and resolution. Save As Saves a PC3 File to a new file name.
Transmission Retry Specifies the timeout value in milliseconds. Settings for COM Port Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Specifies the baud rate, protocol, flow control, and hardware handshaking for serial ports on plotters that support these settings. NOTE The settings on your plotter must match the settings in the program or you cannot plot. List of Options The following options are displayed. Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate. Use the fastest available baud rate.
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Specifies additional hardware handshaking settings for serial ports. List of Options The following options are displayed. CTS Enables Clear To Send handshaking. This monitors pin 5 of a 25-pin serial port or pin 8 of a 9-pin serial port. CTS is an input bit, monitored for an output from the plotter or printer. DSR Enables Data Set Ready handshaking.
Enables RTS handshaking. The driver raises the RTS line when the input buffer is less than one-half full and lowers the RTS line when the buffer is more than three-quarters full. Toggle Specifies that the RTS line is high if bytes are available for transmission. After all buffered bytes have been sent, the RTS line is low. DTR Controls the Data Terminal Ready output pin. This sends a signal to the printer or plotter on pin 20 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9-pin serial port.
A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed at the Command prompt. POINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Creates a point object.
Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point, in addition to the figure drawn through it: PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size.
POLYGON Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Rectangles and Polygons Creates an equilateral closed polyline. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon Menu: Draw ➤ Polygon Toolbar: Draw List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of sides : Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press Enter Specify center of polygon on page 1011 or [Edge on page 1012]: Specify a point (1) or enter e Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon.
Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is shown. PREVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Preview a Plot Displays the drawing as it will be plotted.
Summary The preview is based on the current plot configuration, as defined by the settings in the Page Setup or Plot dialog box. It shows exactly how the drawing will look when plotted, including lineweights, fill patterns, and other plot style options. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs. Dragging the cursor toward the top of the screen while holding down the pick button enlarges the preview image. Dragging toward the bottom of the screen reduces the preview image.
When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. There are several general properties common to all objects. All other object properties are specific to the type of object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Type Displays the type of object that is selected. Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar Turns the PICKADD system variable on (1) and off (0). When PICKADD is on, each object selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. When PICKADD is off, selected objects replace the current selection set. Select Objects Selects desired objects using any selection method.
General Properties of Objects Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Each graphical object in a drawing shares a common set of properties known as the general properties. Summary The following general properties are common to most graphical objects. NOTE Layers or objects that are assigned property overrides in viewports display a ByLayer (VP) value and a background color for applicable properties. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Transparency Specifies the transparency of the object (see TRANSPARENCY). Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness. This property does not apply to all objects (see CHPROP). Cell Border Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Sets the properties of the borders of table cells. Access Methods Pointing device: With a table cell selected and the Properties palette open, click in the value cell for Border Lineweight or Border Color, and click the [...
When checked, a double line border will be added to the selected cells. Spacing Determines the spacing of double-line borders. The default value is .1800. Preview Displays a preview of how the borders of the selected table will look. NOTE Linetypes will not display in the preview. All Borders Applies the border properties settings to all borders of the selected table cells. Outside Borders Applies the border properties settings to the outside borders of the selected table cells.
Add Distance or Angle Value Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Adds distance or angle values to a parameter's value set in a dynamic block definition. List of Options The following options are displayed. Distances or Angle to Add Specifies values (separated by commas) to add to the value set. Distances or Angles List (Unlabeled) Lists the distances or angles defined for the value set. Add Adds the values specified in the Distances or Angle to Add box.
PSETUPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. Summary The Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed in which you can select the drawing (.dwg), template (.dwt), or drawing interchange format (.dxf) file whose page setups you want to import. If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, PSETUPIN displays command prompts.
PSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work in Model Space In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. Summary The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working on a named (paper space) layout. On the named layout, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports, which are windows containing different views of the model.
PUBLISH Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish Drawings Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, and PDF files, or to plotters. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot Menu: File ➤ Publish Toolbar: Standard Summary You can assemble a collection of drawings and create an electronic drawing set. Electronic drawing sets are saved as DWF and DWFx files that can be viewed or plotted using Autodesk Design Review.
Publish Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Summary Specifies drawing sheets that you can assemble, reorder, rename, copy, and save for publishing as a multi-sheet drawing set. You can publish the drawing set to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file or send it to the plotter named in the page setup for hardcopy output or as a plot file. You can save this list of drawing sheets as a DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) file.
Publish To: Defines how to publish the list of sheets. You can publish to either a multi-sheet DWF, DWFx, or PDF file (an electronic drawing set) or to the plotter specified in the page setup (a paper drawing set or a set of plot files). Plotter Named in Page Setup Indicates that the output devices given for each drawing sheet in the page setup will be used. DWF, DWFx, and PDF Selects the output file format: DWF, DWFx, or PDF.
Sheets to Publish Contains the list of drawing sheets to be included for publishing. Click the page setup column to change the sheet’s settings. Use the shortcut menu to add sheets or make other changes to the list. Sheet Name Combines the drawing name and the layout name with a dash (-). Includes the Model tab only if the Include Model When Adding Sheets option is selected. You can copy sheets by clicking Copy Selected Sheets on the shortcut menu.
Precision Optimizes the dpi of DWF, DWFx, and PDF files for your field: manufacturing, architecture or civil engineering. Or you can configure a custom precision preset in the Precision Presets Manager on page 489. This setting overrides the dpi setting in the .PC3 driver. This option is grayed out if no file type is selected in the Publish to: drop-down list. NOTE The precision override is applied to all sheets in the list.
Publish Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Specifies options for publishing. Summary Specifies general options for the published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file such as the file name, the save location, and layer information. List of Options Default Output Location (Plot to File) Specifies the output folder location where DWF, DWFx, PDF, and plot files are saved when you publish drawing sheets.
DWF Data Options Lists and enables you to specify the data that you can optionally include in the DWF or DWFx file. Password Protection Specifies the following options for protecting DWF or DWFx files with passwords: ■ DisabledSpecifies that no password is required. ■ Prompt for Password - Displays the DWF Password Dialog Box on page 1032 when you click Publish. ■ Specify Password - Specifies that the password in the password box is applied to the DWF or DWFx file.
Publish Block Template Dialog Box (Publish) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Summary Specifies which blocks and their properties and attributes to include in the published DWF or DWFx file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Template Displays the name of the current block template. Block Source Drawings Displays all block source drawings that have been loaded into the Publish Block Template dialog box. Add Adds drawings to the list of block source drawings.
Exclude Blocks Without Attributes Excludes blocks without attributes defined. Properties of Selected Blocks Displays properties of selected blocks found in block source drawings. Check Properties to Publish Displays the union of properties of the current selection of blocks. Exclude General Block Properties Excludes all general block properties from the list display. Options Opens the Block Template Options dialog box where you can specify additional settings. Save Saves the block template file.
DWF Password Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Summary Specifies the password to apply to the DWF or DWFx file. DWF or DWFx passwords are case sensitive. The password or phrase can be made up of letters, numbers, punctuation, or non-ASCII characters. WARNING If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be recovered. Keep a list of passwords and their corresponding DWF or DWFx file names in a safe place.
Publish Job Progress Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Summary Displays information about the status and progress of your publish job if background publishing is turned off in the Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab. List of Options The following options are displayed. Cancel Sheet Cancels publishing of the sheet currently being processed. Cancel Job Cancels the publish job.
With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0, enter +publish at the Command prompt. The following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of sheet list : Press ENTER for the current drawing or enter the sheet list name NOTE The bracketed text contains the name of the DSD file used when this command was last run. The bracketed text area is blank if no previous name exists.
Creates HTML pages that include images of selected drawings. Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ Publish to Web Summary The Publish to Web wizard is displayed. This wizard provides a simplified interface for creating formatted web pages that include DWF, DWFx, JPEG, or PNG images of drawings. After creating a web page, you can post it to an Internet or intranet location. Publish to Web Wizard Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages Creates a formatted HTML page.
PURGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilites ➤ Purge Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge Summary The Purge dialog box is displayed. If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Unused named objects can be removed from the current drawing.
Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. Summary Displays items that can be purged. List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects View Items You Can Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can purge. Items Not Used in Drawing Lists the named objects that are not used in the current drawing and that can be purged.
Purge Nested Items removes items only when you select one of the following options: ■ All Items or Blocks in the tree view ■ The Purge All button View Items You Cannot Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can't purge. Items Currently Used in Drawing Lists named objects that cannot be removed from the drawing. Most of these objects are currently used in the drawing or are default items that cannot be removed.
Purge All Purges all unused items. -PURGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes unused named objects, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing at the Command prompt. Summary Allows you to remove unused named objects from a drawing at the Command prompt. You can only remove one level of reference at a time. Repeat the command until there are no unreferenced, named objects.
1040
Q Commands 17 QCCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Summary Closes the QuickCalc calculator. QDIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Dimensioning Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Quick Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Quick Dimension Toolbar: Dimension Summary This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
QKUNGROUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Group Objects ■ UNGROUP on page 1286 Removes a group definition from a drawing. Access Methods Command entry: qkungroup Summary The group definition is deleted; the group is split into its component objects. QLEADER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Leaders ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Creates a leader and leader annotation. Summary It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 742 command to create leader objects.
■ Limit the number of leader points ■ Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments You can use the Leader Settings dialog box to customize the command so that it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type suited to your drawing needs. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the leader start point can be associated with a location on an object.
Leader Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Leaders ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Creates a leader and leader annotation. Summary Customizes the QLEADER command and sets properties for leaders and leader annotations. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed. Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Annotation Type Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation prompt. MText Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation.
Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. Tolerance Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to create a feature control frame to attach to the leader.
Reuse Current Reuses current annotation. This option is automatically selected when you reuse annotation after selecting Reuse Next. Leader Line & Arrow Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Leader Line Sets the leader line format. Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify. Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points. Arrowhead Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension lines (DIMSTYLE command).
Angle Constraints Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines. First Segment Sets the angle of the first leader segment. Second Segment Sets the angle of the second leader segment. Attachment Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Sets the attachment location for leader lines and multiline text annotation. This tab is available only when Mtext is selected on the Annotation tab. Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line.
Underlines the bottom multiline text line. QNEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Drawing Template File Starts a new drawing from a selected drawing template file. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard ➤ New ➤ Drawing Summary QNEW creates a new drawing from the default drawing template file and folder path specified in Default Template File Name for QNEW on the File tab of the Options dialog box.
If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting. QSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Saves the current drawing using the specified default file format. Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ Save Toolbar: Standard Summary If the drawing is named, the program saves the drawing and does not request a new file name.
QSELECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects by Properties Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select Menu: Tools ➤ Quick Select Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Quick Select. Summary The Quick Select dialog box is displayed. QSELECT filters selection sets by object type and property.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Apply To Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection set (if one exists). If Append to Current Selection Set is selected, the filtering criteria is applied to the entire drawing. Select Objects Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that you can select the objects to which you want to apply the filter criteria. Object Type Specifies the type of objects to include in the filtering criteria.
Properties Specifies the object property for the filter. This list includes all searchable properties for the selected object type. The property you select determines the options available in Operator and Value. ® If an application such as AutoCAD Map 3D was used to add a feature classification to an object, you can select a classification property. Operator Controls the range of the filter.
QTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. Summary When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Right-click and click QuickCalc. Summary The QuickCalc calculator performs a full range of mathematical, scientific, and geometric calculations, creates and uses variables, and converts units of measurement. Displays the QuickCalc calculator on page 1055.
Angle of Line Defined by Two Points Calculates the angle of two points. Two Lines Defined by Four Points Calculates the intersection of four points. History Area Displays a running list of previously evaluated expressions. The History area shortcut menu provides several options, including copying a selected expression to the Clipboard. Input Box Provides a box where you enter and retrieve expressions. More/Less Button Hides or Displays all QuickCalc function areas.
Shortcut functions are common expressions that combine a function with an object snap. The following table describes the predefined shortcut functions in the list.
Defines a variable to store in the variables tree. List of Options The following options are displayed. Variable Type Specifies the type of variable. Constant Stores the new variable as a constant. Function Stores the new variable as a function. Variable Properties Defines the properties of a new variable. Name Stores the name of the variable. Names of constants cannot include spaces. Group With Stores the named variable in the selected category.
Settings The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the title bar. Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the dialog box. The dialog box does not dock. Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or a corner to make the smaller or larger. Close Closes the Markup Set Manager. Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor the calculator.
OK Closes the dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable. Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the current settings. Help Displays Help. QUICKCUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Edit Toolbars Displays the Customize User Interface Editor in a collapsed state. Summary The Customize User Interface Editor on page 242 is displayed in a collapsed state. Only the Customizations In and Command List panes are displayed.
Summary Displays the Quick Properties palette that displays a customizable list of object properties for one or more selected objects. The behavior of the Quick Propetries palette is controlled by settings on the Quick Properties tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (DSETTINGS on page 414). The QPMODE on page 1632 system variable controls whether the palette is displayed automatically when objects are selected. QUIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing Exits the program.
QVDRAWING Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Displays open drawings and layouts in a drawing in preview images. Access Methods Buton Shortcut menu: Click on the status bar. Summary Displays a two-level structure of preview images at the bottom of the application. The first level displays the images of open drawings and the second level displays the images for model space and layouts in a drawing.
Summary Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing. QVLAYOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. Access Methods Buton Shortcut menu: Click on the status bar. Summary Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing in a row at the bottom of the application.
Access Methods Button Shortcut menu: Click on the Quick View drawings toolbar. Summary Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawings.
R Commands 18 RAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray Menu: Draw ➤ Ray Summary The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command.
Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as references for creating other objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2) RECOVER Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file.
Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover ➤ Recover Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover Summary The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files that can be recovered include DWG, DWT, and DWS files. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file. In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed in the text window.
■ Copies of the original drawing files are saved as BAK files. ■ If the object enabler is present, custom objects are updated. Results are displayed in the Drawing Recovery Log window. Each drawing file checked includes a Drawing Recovery Log that can be expanded or collapsed. The entire log can be copied to the Windows clipboard with the Copy to Clipboard button. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVERALL displays the following command prompt.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Rotation = 0 Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Specify a point or enter an option First Corner Point Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners. Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width.
REDO Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command. Access Methods Button Menu: Edit ➤ Redo Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Redo. Command entry: Ctrl+Y Summary REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must immediately follow the U or UNDO command.
Summary Removes temporary graphics left by VSLIDE and some operations from the current viewport. To remove stray pixels, use the REGEN command. REFCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
Save Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block definition in the current drawing all changes made to objects in the working set. If you remove an object from the working set and save changes, the object is deleted from the reference and added to the current drawing. The Save Back Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing changes.
Toolbar: Refedit Summary The objects that you select from the selected xref or block are temporarily extracted and made available for editing in the current drawing. The set of extracted objects is called the working set, which can be modified and then saved back to update the xref or block definition. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Reference Edit Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks Specifies the reference to edit. Summary To select a reference to edit, select an object in the reference. If you select an object that is part of one or more nested references, the nested references are displayed in the dialog box.
Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested within the selected reference. Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference. If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at a time. Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference. The preview image displays the reference as it was last saved in the drawing.
Controls whether all variable attribute definitions in block references are extracted and displayed during reference editing. If Display Attribute Definitions for Editing is selected, the attributes (except constant attributes) are made invisible, and the attribute definitions are available for editing along with the selected reference geometry. When changes are saved back to the block reference, the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged.
block reference, the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged. The new or altered attribute definitions affect only subsequent insertions of the block; the attributes in existing block instances are not affected. All Objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the reference editing session. Nested After you close the Reference Edit dialog box and enter the reference edit state, you are prompted to select the specific objects in the reference that you want to edit.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-place Editing ➤ Add to Working Set Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-Place Editing ➤ Remove from Working Set Summary Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other objects in the current drawing. All objects in the current drawing, except objects in the working set, appear faded. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing...
REGEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Regen Summary REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.
REGION Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Region Menu: Draw ➤ Region Toolbar: Draw Summary Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops. Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines.
The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point shares only two edges. All intersections and self-intersecting curves are rejected. If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object. REGION deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0.
List of Options The following options are displayed. I/O Port Initialization Reinitializes the I/O port for the digitizer. Device File Initialization Reinitializes the digitizer and the acaslt.pgp file. RENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.
Rename Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References Changes the names assigned to named objects such as layers and dimension styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category. Items Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects. Old Name Specifies the item to be renamed. You can use the wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of items.
-RENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References Changes the names assigned to named objects from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
RESUME Quick Reference See also: ■ Run Slide Shows from Scripts ■ Create Command Scripts Continues an interrupted script. Access Methods Command entry: 'resume for transparent use Summary You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing Esc or Backspace. Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while the program is active, you can use RESUME to continue the script.
Menu: Draw ➤ Revision Cloud Toolbar: Draw Summary NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud. Use revision clouds to highlight parts of a drawing that are being reviewed.
REVDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Date and Time Stamps to Layouts Inserts or updates a block containing user name, current time and date, and drawing name. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Time and Date Stamp Summary A revdate block is inserted, or an existing revdate block is updated. You can explode the revdate block and place its contents in another location, such as a title block.
Summary Vertices of selected objects are reversed. For example, when a linetype with text is specified with relative rotation in a LIN file, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Reversing the vertices of the object changes the orientation of the text. The REVERSE command does not change the orientation of text where rotation is specified as upright. For more information, see Text in Custom Linetypes.
ROTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate Objects Rotates objects around a base point. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate Menu: Modify ➤ Rotate Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate. Right-click in the drawing area and click Rotate. Summary You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for rotation. Reference Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new, absolute angle. When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the drawing area. RSCRIPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Run Slide Shows from Scripts ■ Create Command Scripts Repeats a script file.
S Commands 19 SAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. Obsolete. The SAVE command is functionally identical to the QSAVE on page 1050 command. The Save option on the File menu, Standard toolbar, or Quick Access toolbar is QSAVE. Summary If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS on page 1091 command to save changes under a different file name.
Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Save As Summary The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a ™ file name and type. Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance. See Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats for a description of the limitations that result from saving to an earlier version.
Summary The Template Options dialog box displays automatically after you specify the files of type as *.dwt, enter the template file name, and click Save. List of Options The following options are displayed. Description Specifies a description for the drawing template. This description is displayed when you choose the template in the Startup dialog box or in the Create New Drawing dialog box. Measurement Specifies whether the drawing template uses English (imperial) or metric units.
Saveas Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Sets options for DWG files and for drawing interchange file output. List of Options The following options are displayed. ■ DWG Options ■ DXF Options DWG Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box) Controls the display of custom objects and specifies the default file format for saving drawings.
Save All Drawings As Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to. You can also set this option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box. For more information, see OPTIONS. DXF Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box) Sets drawing interchange file output options. Format Specifies whether to create an ASCII or a binary DXF file. ASCII-format DXF files can be read with a text editor and are compatible with a wider range of applications. Binary-format DXF files are more compact.
SAVEAS Command Prompts Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale. Right-click in the drawing area and click Scale. Summary To scale an object, specify a base point and a scale factor. The base point acts as the center of the scaling operation and remains stationary. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
SCALELISTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Scale List Menu: Format ➤ Scale List Command entry: 'scalelistedit for transparent use Summary Displays a list of predefined scales used throughout the program. This list can be easily modified to display only the scales you need.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary scales that are imported when xrefs are attached. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Displays the Add Scale dialog box. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Edit Displays the Edit Scale dialog box. NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales.
Add Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Adds a new scale to the scale list. List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Name Name Appearing in Scale List Specifies the scale name to add to the scale list. Scale Properties Sets the ratio of paper units to drawing units. Paper Units When combined with the value of the drawing units, determines the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.
Edit Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Changes the existing scales listed in the Scale List area. List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Name Lists the name of the currently selected scale in the Scale List area. NOTE You cannot change the name of a scale that is referenced by an xref. Name Appearing in Scale List Enter a descriptive or numeric name.
-SCALELISTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [?/Add/Delete/Reset/Exit] : Enter an option or press Enter ? Displays a list of defined scales. Add Adds a new scale to the scale list.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Scale Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Scale Toolbar: Text List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The selected text is scaled by a ratio of the values that you entered for the new length and the reference length. If the new length is less than the reference length, the selected text objects are reduced in size. SCRIPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Command Scripts Executes a sequence of commands from a script file.
SECURITYOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Protect and Sign Drawings Specifies password or digital signature options for a drawing file. Summary The Security Options dialog box is displayed. You can add security settings that are applied when you save the drawing. Security Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Protect and Sign Drawings Specifies security settings to be used when your drawing is saved. List of Options The following options are displayed.
and a Comments area (to include information relevant to the digital signature or to the files you are signing). Get Time Stamp From Provides a list of time servers you can use to time stamp your digital signature. NOTE The timesrvr.txt file contains the time servers that you can choose from. Time Service Status Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted Time Server or Could Not Contact Time Server) of the time service.
NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available in US English only. SELECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects Individually Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. Summary A small box, called the object selection target or pickbox, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor. At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous option to retrieve the previous selection set. To view all options, enter ? at the Command prompt.
Last Selects the most recently created visible object. The object must be in the current space, that is, model space or paper space, and its layer must not be set to frozen or off. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection. Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points.
WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable. CPolygon Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times.
Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to hold down Shift while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option. Multiple Selects objects individually without highlighting them during object selection. This speeds up object selection for highly complex objects. Previous Selects the most recent selection set.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select the object that you want to use as the template object to select similar objects. Right-click in the drawing area and click Select Similar. Summary Selects similar objects of the same type based on specified matching properties, such as the color or block name. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box.
Name Considers referenced objects (such as blocks, xrefs, and images) with matching names to be similar. SETBYLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Set to ByLayer Menu: Modify ➤ Change to ByLayer List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Changes property overrides for color, linetype, lineweight, material, plot style, and transparency to ByLayer for selected objects and inserted blocks on unlocked layers. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Changes the color of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=1) Linetype Changes the linetype of selected objects to ByLayer.
Changes the transparency value of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=128) SETENV Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Sets values of specified registry variables. Summary Use SETENV to view the registry settings of the MaxArray and MaxHatch registry variables. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name: Specify a name Value: Enter a new value for the variable NOTE SETENV is case sensitive.
Access Methods Button Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name or [?] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set. You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt by entering the name of the variable and its new value. ?—List Variables Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current settings.
On systems that display fewer than 256 colors, SHADE produces an image that removes hidden lines and displays the faces in their original color with no lighting effect. SHADEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Controls the display of solid object shading in the current viewport. SHARE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Shares the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing with other users.
Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Share panel ➤ Share Drawing Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Share Drawing Toolbar: Online Summary The Share Drawing dialog box on page 1117 is displayed. You must save the drawing before you can continue with this command. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.
The permissions can be changed at any time in the Share Drawing dialog box; new permissions take effect immediately. List of Options The following options are displayed. Invite People Specifies recipients from your AutoCAD WS contacts. Enter multiple email addresses to share a drawing with several users at once. Share Sends email notifications to recipients with the link to the drawing, a message, and a preview of the drawing. Edit Allows recipients to edit any object in the shared drawing.
Summary Publishes single blocks or entire drawings to the Autodesk Seek website. You must be a registered user on the Autodesk Seek website to upload content. Currently, you can only upload a single drawing file at a time. NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available in US English only. Share with Autodesk Seek Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings Uploads the selected block or the current drawing file to the Autodesk Seek website.
Lists the blocks in the current drawing available for upload to the Autodesk Seek website. Share the Current Drawing Selects the current drawing (not including external references) for upload to the Autodesk Seek website. If you choose to use the last saved version of the file, it uploads the file in its current file format. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected block or the current drawing (if available).
Sheet Set Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Sheet Set Displays and organizes named collections of drawing sheets Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Summary The Sheet Set Manager is not fully functional if ■ The command is active; ■ No drawing is open; ■ The sheet set is locked by another user; or ■ A lock icon displayed in front of the sheet set name in the Sheet Set Manager indicate
Sheet List Control The Sheet List control displays the name of the current sheet set, or, if no sheet sets are open, the Open option. The Sheet List control provides the following options for all tabs: Names of Open Sheet Sets Lists all open sheet sets, if any. A check is displayed next to the current sheet set. Recent Displays a list of recently opened sheet sets. New Sheet Set Starts the Create Sheet Set wizard. Open Displays the Open Sheet Set standard file selection dialog box.
Publish to DWF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWF file. Publish to DWFx Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx file. Publish to PDF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx file. Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default plotter or printer.
Import Layout as Sheet Displays the Import Layouts as Sheets dialog box. Include Plot Stamp Turns the plot stamp on or off for the selected sheet set, subset, or sheet. Include for Publish Includes the sheet for publishing. Insert Sheet List Table Displays the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box. Manage Page Setups Displays the Page Setup Manager dialog box. New Sheet Displays the New Sheet dialog box.
template (DWT) file designated to be the source of the page setup override information. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box. Publish to DWF Publishes the selected sheets or the sheet set to a specified DWF file. Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default plotter or printer. Remove Subset Removes the currently selected subset from the organization of the sheet set. Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Summary The Sheet Views tab displays an ordered list of views used in the current sheet set. You can organize these views under headings, called categories, that you create. NOTE Only sheet views created in AutoCAD 2005 or later are listed on the Sheet Views tab.
Properties (View Category) Displays the View Category dialog box. Rename Renames the selected sheet view category. Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename and Renumber View dialog box where you can renumber and retitle the selected sheet view. Set Category Reassigns the selected sheet view to a category that you specify.
checks all drawing files that are expanded for new or removed model space views. Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box, in which you can add a folder location to the sheet set. Shortcut Menu Options Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box where you can add a folder location to the sheet set. eTransmit Displays the Create Transmittal dialog box. Open File Opens the selected drawing (DWG) file.
Summary You can organize sheets by dragging them to different subsets. List of Options The following options are displayed. Subset Name Specifies the name of this subset and the name of the sheet storage folder for this subset if Create Folders Relative to Parent Subset Storage Location is selected. Publish Sheets in Subset Conforms to the current settings for sheet set publishing.
The syntax for this property is layoutname [folderpath\]filename.dwt Prompt for Template When Yes is selected, prompts you to specify a drawing template file rather than use the default drawing template file for creating new sheets. Publish Sheets Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Specifies the sheets to be included for publishing. Summary When a sheet is selected, it is included for publishing.
Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Specifies the folder path, drawing template (DWT) file, and layout name to be used for creating new sheets. List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing Template File Name Specifies the drawing template file path and name to be used for creating new sheets. Select a Layout to Create New Sheets Lists and specifies the name of the layout in the drawing template file to be used for new sheets.
New Sheet Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Creates a new sheet in the current sheet set by creating a new drawing (DWG) file that includes a layout tab with the same name as the drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Number Specifies the sheet number. It is recommended that you do not fill in the sheet number when you first create a sheet. By default the drawing name and layout name of the new sheet will be the sheet number together with sheet title.
Displays the default folder for the new drawing file. The default folder for a subset is specified in the Subset Properties dialog box; and the default folder for a sheet set is specified in the Sheet Set Properties dialog box. Sheet Template Displays the default sheet template file used for creating the new drawing file.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected sheet. Sheet Title Specifies the sheet title of the selected sheet. Layout Name Specifies the name of the layout associated with the selected sheet. File Name Specifies the name of the drawing file associated with the selected sheet. Folder Path Displays the folder path for the drawing file. Rename Layout to match Sheet Title When checked, changes the layout name to match the sheet title.
Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Specifies a sheet number and view title for a view in a sheet set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected view. View Title Specifies the view title of the selected view. Previous Loads the previous view into this dialog box. Next Loads the next view into this dialog box.
Provides a method for quickly importing layouts into a sheet set, and specifying which layout tab is to be used as the sheet. Summary If a layout already belongs to a sheet set, you must create a copy of the drawing containing the layout to import it. List of Options The following options are displayed. Browse for Drawings Displays the Select Drawing standard file selection dialog box. List of Layouts in Selected Drawing Lists all available layouts in the specified drawing file.
Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Creates a table listing the sheets in the sheet set. Summary This table can be added to any sheet in the current sheet set, but it is typically added to the title sheet. NOTE Insert Sheet List Table on the sheet set shortcut menu is not available if the Model tab is active, or if the current layout is not a sheet in the current sheet set. List of Tabs This dialog box contains the following tabs.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Table Style Name Specifies the table style to be used for the table. Table Style Preview Displays a preview of the currently selected table style. Include Subsets as Headers in Output When checked, displays the names of the subsets, dividing the sheet list table into sections. Table Style Settings Displays options for the table style. Table Data Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays options for the table data.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Title Text Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table. Column Settings Area Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table. Each line in the list represents a column. The top-to-bottom order of the list represents how the columns will be displayed in the table (left to right). Data Type Column Selecting a column definition and then clicking on an entry in the Data Type column displays a list.
Subsets and Sheets Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays options to control the sheet selection represented by the current sheet list table List of Options The following options are displayed. Populate From Sheet Selection Drop-Down Menu Sets the check state of the items in the view based on a previous saved sheet selection. Sheet Set Tree View Displays the sheet set subsets that are to be updated automatically.
Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Allows you to edit a sheet list table that exists in the current drawing. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select any cell in Sheet List Table ➤ Right-click to open the shortcut menu ➤ Edit Sheet List Table Settings Summary The Edit Sheet List Table Settings dialog box gives you access to all the settings found on the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the table style to be used for the table. The Browse button displays the Table Style dialog box. Table Style Sample Area Displays a sample of the currently selected table style. Show Subheader When checked, displays the names of the subsets, dividing the sheet list table into sections. Table Data Settings Displays options for the table data. Title Text Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table. Column Settings Area Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table.
Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet set. Summary You can click on each field to display a description at the bottom of the dialog box.
Sheet Set Data File Displays the path and file name of the sheet set data (DST) file. Description Displays a description of the sheet set. Model View Displays the paths and names of folders that contain drawings used by the sheet set. Label Block for Views Displays the path and file name of the DWT or DWG file that contains the label blocks for the sheet set. Callout Blocks Displays the path and file name of the DWT or DWG file that contains the callout blocks for the sheet set.
Lists the custom properties associated with the current sheet set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Add Displays the Add Custom Property dialog box. Delete Removes the selected custom property from the sheet set. Add Custom Property Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets Creates a custom property to be associated with the current sheet set or with each sheet.
Summary Custom properties can be used to store information such as a contract number, the name of the designer, and the release date. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Specifies the name of a new custom property. Default Value Specifies a value for the custom property. Owner Specifies whether the custom property belongs to the sheet set or to a sheet.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Add Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box, in which you can add a folder location to the list. Delete Removes the selected folder from the list. Sheet Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet, such as the sheet title, sheet number, and whether it will be included in publishing operations. Also displays custom properties, if any.
Summary You can enter a new value to modify any available sheet property. List of Options The following options are displayed. Sheet and Sheet Custom Properties Displays the properties of the selected sheet. Also displays custom properties, if any. You can enter a new value to modify any sheet property. The Expected Layout is the path and file name of the drawing where the sheet was saved. The Found Layout is the path and file name of the drawing where the sheet was found.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Enter the Sheet Selection Name Specifies a name for the sheet selection. Sheet Selections Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Renames or deletes saved sheet selections. List of Options The following options are displayed. Sheet Selections Specifies the sheet selection that you want to rename or delete. Rename Renames the selected sheet selection. Delete Deletes the selected sheet selection.
View Category Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize a Sheet Set Creates a new view category in a sheet set. Summary You can organize views by dragging them under different view categories. List of Options The following options are displayed. Category Name Specifies the name of a new view category. Select the Callout Blocks to be Used in this Category Provides a method for listing the callout blocks appropriate to the current view category. Add Blocks Displays the List of Blocks dialog box.
Summary This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Add Blocks button in the View Category dialog box, or by clicking the [...] button next to Callout blocks in the Sheet Set Properties dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. List of Blocks Displays the list of blocks available for use with the current sheet set. Add Displays the Select Block dialog box. Delete Removes the selected block from the list of callout blocks.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Enter the Drawing File Name Specifies the path and name of a drawing (DWG) file or the name and path of a drawing template (DWT) file to be used as the source of a block definition. Select the Drawing File as a Block Uses the entire specified drawing file or drawing template file as the block definition. Choose Blocks in the Drawing File Uses a selected block definition from the specified drawing file or drawing template file.
SHOWPALETTES Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Restores the display of hidden palettes. Access Methods Command entry: Ctrl+Shift+H Summary Restores the state of the display and position of palettes hidden by HIDEPALETTES. Press Ctrl+Shift+H to switch between HIDEPALETTES and SHOWPALETTES.
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ View Digital Signature Details Displays information about a digital signature. Summary You can determine if a digital signature is valid and if the signed file has been modified since it was signed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being viewed.
Contains a list of the xref drawings in a signed file. This list is available only if the current file contains xrefs and View Xref Drawings is selected. View Xref Signature Displays the Digital Signatures Contents dialog box for the selected xref. This button is enabled only if the xref has a valid digital signature attached. Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ View Digital Signature Details Displays information about a digital signature.
Other Fields Displays the subject, issuer, valid from date, valid to date, or serial number in the Values box. Subject Displays information about the organization or individual who owns the digital ID and attached the digital signature. Issuer Displays the name of the certificate authority that originally issued the digital ID. Valid From Displays the day, month, year, and exact time from which the digital ID can be first used and is considered valid.
SKETCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Creates a series of freehand line segments. Summary Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer. Specify the object type (line, polyline, or spline), increment, and tolerance before sketching. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Sketch on page 1157 or [Type on page 1157/Increment on page 1158/toLerance on page 1158]: Sketch Creates a sketch.
Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line. (SKETCHINC on page 1659 system variable) Tolerance For Splines, specifies how closely the spline’s curve fits to the freehand sketch. (SKTOLERANCE on page 1660 system variable) SNAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.
Off Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings. Aspect Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions. Style Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric. Standard Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may differ. Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid. Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.
Grid Sets the snap to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points. SOLID Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Hatch Properties Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals. Summary 2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on (1) and the viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid.
SPACETRANS Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Scale and Justification Calculates equivalent model space and paper space lengths in a layout. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Text List of Prompts In a layout, when in model space, the prompt is displayed as follows: Specify paper space distance <1.
used at the Command prompt, SPACETRANS displays the computed length equivalent at the Command prompt. NOTE This command is not available from the Model tab or in a perspective view. SPELL Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Checks spelling in a drawing.
Check Spelling Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Displays the spelling checker dialog box that picks and displays the wrongly spelt words and suggests alternate words. Summary Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions. In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked.
Select Text Objects Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text, dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within xrefs. Not in Dictionary Displays the word identified as misspelled. Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary. You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a replacement word in the top Suggestions text area. Main Dictionary Lists the main dictionary options.
Undo Reverses the previous check spelling action or series of actions, including Ignore, Ignore All, Change, Change All, and Add to Dictionary. Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Provides options to change the way the default behavior of the spelling checker dialog box. Summary Specifies specific text options that will be checked in your drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Include Dimension Text Searches dimension text.
Searches block attributes text for spelling errors. External References Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mix Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters. Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers.
Summary Manages dictionaries. During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are matched to the words in the current main and current custom dictionaries. Any spelling exceptions that you identify with the Add option are stored in the custom dictionary you are currently using. If you want to check spelling in another language, you can change to a different main dictionary. You can also create any number of custom dictionaries and switch between them as needed.
Content Displays a list of the words that currently exist in the specified custom dictionary. You can add words to or delete words from the list below. Add Adds the word that you enter in the box to the current custom dictionary. The maximum length is 63 characters. Delete Deletes a word from current custom dictionary content. Import Imports words from another dictionary or word list into your current custom dictionary.
Custom Dictionaries List Displays the custom dictionaries list. Only one dictionary can be selected at a time. New Allows you to create a custom dictionary. The new dictionary is highlighted as the current one. NOTE The filename for a custom dictionary cannot use any non-current code page characters in its name. If you are sharing a custom dictionary between different locals or languages do not use non-ASCII characters. Add Allows you to add an existing custom dictionary from your file lists.
Summary SPLINE creates curves called nonuniform rational B-splines (NURBS), referred to as splines for simplicity. Splines are defined either with fit points, or with control vertices. By default, fit points coincide with the spline, while control vertices define a control frame. Control frames provide a convenient method to shape the spline. Each method has its advantages. For splines created with control vertices, you can display the control frame by selecting the spline.
Control Vertices Creates a spline by specifying control vertices. Use this method to create splines of degree 1 (linear), degree 2 (quadratic), degree 3 (cubic), and so on up to degree 10. Adjusting the shape of a spline by moving control vertices often provides better results than moving fit points. Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines. The original polyline is retained or discarded depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable.
■ Chord (or Chord-Length method). Spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the distances between each associated pair of fit points. An example is the green curve in the illustration. ■ Square Root (or Centripetal method). Spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the square root of the distance between each associated pair of fit points. This method usually produces “gentler” curves. An example is the blue curve in the illustration.
Tolerance Specifies the distance by which the spline is allowed to deviate from the specified fit points. A tolerance value of 0 requires the resulting spline to pass directly through the fit points. The tolerance value applies to all fit points except the starting and ending fit points, which always have a tolerance of 0. Options for Splines with Control Vertices The following option is specific to the control vertices (CV) method.
Summary Modifies the data that defines a spline, such as the number and weight of control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the starting and ending tangents. NOTE SPLINEDIT automatically converts spline-fit polylines to splines even if you immediately exit SPLINEDIT after selecting the spline-fit polyline. The data that defines a spline is represented in one of two formats: as a control frame or as fit points.
Join Combines a selected spline with other splines, lines, polylines, and arcs at coincident endpoints to form a larger spline. Objects are joined with kinks at the points where they are joined (C0 continuity).
Kink Adds a knot and fit point at the specified location on the spline, which does not maintain tangent or curvature continuity at that point. Move Moves fit points to new locations. New Location Moves the selected fit point to the specified location. Next Selects the next fit point. Previous Selects the previous fit point. Select Point Select any fit point on the spline. Purge Replaces the fit data from the spline with control vertices. Tangents Changes the starting and ending tangents of a spline.
Enter a vertex editing option [Add on page 1177/Delete on page 1177/Elevate order on page 1177/Move on page 1177/Weight on page 1177/eXit on page 1177] : Add Adds a new control vertex at the point you specify that is located between two existing control vertices. Delete Removes a selected control vertex. Elevate Order Increases the polynomial order (degree plus one) of the spline. This results in increasing the number of control vertices across the spline. The maximum value is 26.
NOTE A high precision value will decrease performance. The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. The DELOBJ system variable determines whether the original spline is retained. Reverse Reverses the direction of the spline. This option is intended primarily for third-party applications. Undo Cancels the last action. Exit Returns to the Command prompt.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon... Select objects: Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method, and press Enter. Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched. STRETCH moves only the vertices and endpoints that lie inside the crossing selection, leaving those outside unchanged.
If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is treated as an X,Y,Z displacement. STYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Text Styles Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
You can specify the current text style to determine the appearance of all new text. A text style includes the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics. Text Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Text Styles Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Summary Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Text Style Lists the current text style.
Styles Displays the list of styles in the drawing. A indicates that the style is . icon before the style name Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). Style List Filter The drop-down list specifies whether all styles or only the styles in use are displayed in the styles list. Preview Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects.
Size Changes the size of the text. Annotative Specifies that the text is . Click the information icon to learn more about the annotative objects. Match Text Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the text in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the option is cleared. Height or Paper Text Height Sets the text height based on the value you enter. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style automatically.
Oblique Angle Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value between -85 and 85 italicizes the text. NOTE TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted as specified by applied character formatting. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas. Commas are used to separate SHX files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file. Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file name. If you do not enter a file name extension, this program searches for an SHX file. If the file is not located, Windows substitutes the first located registered TrueType font.
STYLESMANAGER Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Plot Style Tables Displays the Plot Style Manager, where you can revise plot style tables. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Manage Plot Styles Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Summary In the folder, you can start the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, or double-click an STB or CTB file to open the Plot Style Table Editor. ■ Double-click the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard to add plot style tables.
Summary Plot style tables contain and define plot styles, which can be assigned to objects. When complete, the wizard produces an STB or CTB file depending on the type of table you are creating. You can edit these files in the Plot Style Table Editor. To use your new plot style table, the selected options on the Plot and Publish tab of the Options dialog box must be appropriate for the type of plot style table (named or color-dependent) you created.
■ Choose Plot Style Table Editor from the Finish screen in the Add Plot Style Table wizard. ■ In the Page Setup dialog box under Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments), select a plot style and click the Edit button. ■ In the Current Plot Style and Select Plot Style dialog boxes, choose Editor.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Style Table File Name Displays the name of the plot style table file you are editing. Description Provides a description area for a plot style table. File Information Displays information about the plot style table you are editing: number of plot styles, path, and version number of the Plot Style Table Editor.
Summary Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. In general, the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles. If you have a large number of plot styles, the Form view is more convenient because the plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the selected style are displayed to the right.
Specifies the settings for the new plot style you are adding to the current plot style table. Color Specifies the plotted color for an object. The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color. If you assign a plot style color, the color overrides the object's color at plot time. You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box and select one of the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. The color you specify is displayed in the plot style color list as Custom Color.
Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255. Many non-pen plotters can simulate pen plotters using virtual pens. For many devices, you can program the pen's width, fill pattern, end style, join style, and color/screening from the front panel on the plotter. Enter 0 or Automatic to specify that the program should make the virtual pen assignment from the AutoCAD Color Index. The virtual pen setting in a plot style is used only by non-pen plotters and only if they are configured for virtual pens.
Line Join Style If you assign a line join style, the line join style overrides the object's line join style at plot time. Fill Style If you assign a fill style, the fill style overrides the object's fill style at plot time. Add Style Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table. The plot style is based on Normal, which uses an object's properties and doesn't apply any overrides by default. You must specify the overrides you want to apply after you create the new plot style.
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Modifies the width values of existing lineweights. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Lists the lineweights in the plot style table. You can modify existing lineweights, but you can't add or delete them. If you change a lineweight value, other plot styles that use the lineweight also change.
SUBTRACT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Combines selected regions by subtraction. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Region ➤ Subtract Summary With SUBTRACT, you can create a 2D region object by subtracting one set of existing region objects from another, overlapping set. You can select only regions for use with this command. Select the objects that you want to keep, press Enter, then select the objects that you want to subtract.
Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first selection set. A single new region is created. You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes. The program then produces separate subtracted regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar regions are rejected. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
SYSWINDOWS Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Arranges windows and icons when the application window is shared with external applications. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Window panel ➤ Tile Horizontally Menu: Window ➤ Cascade Menu: Window ➤ Tile Horizontally Menu: Window ➤ Tile Vertically Menu: Window ➤ Arrange Icons List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Arrange Icons Arranges the window icons. Arranges multiple open drawings, when minimized, in a line at the bottom of the workspace.
T Commands 20 TABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Creates an empty table object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Insert Table Menu: Draw ➤ Table Toolbar: Draw Summary A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can be created from an empty table or a table style. A table can also be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
The Insert Table dialog box is displayed. If you select a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual tab displays. If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Insert Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Creates an empty table object.
Summary Inserts an empty table in the drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Table Style Choose a table style from within the current drawing from which to create a table. You can create a new table style by clicking the button next to the drop-down list. Insert Options Specifies the method for inserting your table. Start from Empty Table Creates an empty table that can be filled in with data manually. Start from Data Link Creates a table from data in an external spreadsheet.
Preview Controls whether a preview displays. If you start from an empty table, the preview displays an example of the table style. If you create a table link, the preview displays the resulting table. Clear this option to improve performance when working with large tables. Insertion Behavior Specifies the location of the table. Specify Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. You can use the pointing device or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt.
Data Rows Specifies the number of rows. When the Specify Window option is selected and you specify a row height, the Auto option is selected, and the number of rows is controlled by the height of the table. A table style with a title row and a header row has a minimum of three rows. The minimum row height is one line. If a table style containing a starting table has been specified, then you can choose the number of additional data rows you would like added to that starting table.
Blocks Retains blocks from the starting table in the newly-inserted table. Retain Cell Style Overrides Retains cell style overrides from the starting table in the newly-inserted table. Data Links Retains data links from the starting table in the newly-inserted table. Table Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables List of Options The following options are displayed. Rows/Columns Panel Insert Row Above Inserts a row above the currently selected cell or row.
Cell Styles Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The cell styles Title, Header, and Data are always contained within any table style, and cannot be deleted or renamed. Cell Borders Sets the properties of the borders of the selected table cells. Alignment Specifies alignment for the content within cells. Content is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell.
Examples For the Date data type only, displays a list of date display options for the date option you selected in the Format field. Click a date in the Format field to see an example. Insert Panel Block The Insert dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a block into the currently selected table cell. Field The Field dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a field into the currently selected table cell. Formula Inserts a formula into the currently selected table cell.
Access Methods Toolbar: Table Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing any single cell, and click Manage Cell Content. List of Options The following options are displayed. Cell Content List Box Lists all text and/or blocks in the selected cell in order of appearance. Text is indicated with the label Table Cell Text. Blocks are indicated with Block preceding the name of the block. Content Order Buttons Move Up Moves the selected list box content up in the display order.
Layout Mode Options Changes the direction in which cell content will appear. Flow Places cell content based on the width of the cell. Stacked Horizontal Places cell content horizontally, regardless of cell width. Stacked Vertical Places cell content vertically, regardless of cell height. Content Spacing Determines the spacing between text and/or blocks within the cell. -TABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Creates an empty table object.
Height Specifies a height for the table rows. Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain a starting table. For more information, see Work with Table Styles. Auto Specifies a size and a location for the table. When this option is selected, you can set the number of columns or the column width, but not both. The number of rows and the row height depend on the size of the window you specify. First Corner Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table.
The cell type is set in the Properties palette. The Header and Title cell styles use the Label cell type by default. Data Text Retains rows with a cell type of Data found in the table style’s starting table. The cell type is set in the Properties palette. The Data cell style uses the Data cell type property by default. Data Links Retains data links found in the specified table style’s starting table. For more information, see Link a Table to External Data.
TABLEEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With a table selected, right-click and click Export. Summary A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Table data is exported in the comma-separated (CSV) file format. All formatting of the table and its text is lost. TABLESTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
Summary The Table Style dialog box is displayed. You can specify the current table style to determine the appearance of all new tables. A table style includes settings for background colors, margins, borders, text, and other table characteristics. Table Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Sets the current table style and creates, modifies, and deletes table styles. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Preview Of Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list. Set Current Sets the table style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new tables are created using this table style. New Displays the Create New Table Style dialog box, in which you can define new table styles. Modify Displays the Modify Table Style dialog box, in which you can modify table styles. Delete Deletes the table style selected in the Styles list.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Names the new table style. Start With Specifies an existing table style whose settings are the default for the new table style. Continue Displays the New Table Style dialog box, in which you define the new table style. New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Defines a new table style or modifies an existing table style.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Starting Table Allows you to specify a table in your drawing to use as an example for formatting this table style. Once you select a table, you can specify the structure and contents you want copied from that table to the table style. With the Remove Table icon, you can remove a table from the current specified table style. General Table Direction Sets the direction of a table. Down creates a table that reads from top to bottom.
General Tab Properties Fill Color Specifies the background color of the cell. The default is None. You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Alignment Sets justification and alignment for the text in the table cell. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell. Text is center-justified, left-justified, or right-justified with respect to the left and right borders of the cell.
Vertical Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the top and bottom cell borders. Merge cells on row/column creation Merges any new row or column created with the current cell style into one cell. You can use this option to create a title row at the top of your table. Text Tab Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Height Sets the text height.
Borders Tab Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border button. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to increase the cell margins. Linetype Sets the linetype to be applied to the borders you specify. Choose Other to load a custom linetype. Color Sets the color to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border button. Choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Double Line Displays table borders as double lines.
Applies the border properties settings to the inside border. Bottom Border Applies the border properties settings to the bottom borders. Left Border Applies the border properties settings to the left borders. Top Border Applies the border properties settings to the top borders. Right Border Applies the border properties settings to the right borders. No Border Hides borders. Cell Style Preview Displays an example of the effect of the current table style settings.
New Style Name Names the new cell style. Start With Specifies an existing cell style whose settings are the default for the new cell style. Continue Returns you to the New Table Style dialog box, in which you define the new cell style. Manage Cell Styles Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Displays all cell styles within the current table style and allows you to create or delete a cell style. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The cell styles Title, Header, and Data are always contained within any table style. New Displays the Create New Cell Style dialog box. From here, you can create a new cell style to be contained within the current table style. Rename Allows you to give a new name to the selected cell style. The Title, Header, and Data cell styles cannot be renamed. Delete Allows you to delete the selected cell style.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Type Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and so on) that you can format for table rows. Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list. Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed.
X, Y, and Z Coordinates For a Point data type only, filters X, Y, or Z coordinates. Additional Format For Angle, Decimal Number, Point, and Whole Number data types only, opens the Additional Format dialog box, where you set additional formatting options for table cells. Examples For the Date data type only, displays a list of date display options for the date option you selected in the Format field. Click a date in the Format field to see an example.
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches value when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Cal Calibrates the digitizer with a paper drawing or photograph, creating the tablet transformation, which is the mapping of points from the tablet to the coordinate drawing system. Calibration is digitizing points on the drawing and mapping them to their real coordinates. Calibration can be performed in model space or paper space. The Cal option turns on Tablet mode in the space in which the tablet is calibrated. When the space is changed, the Cal option turns off Tablet mode.
Affine Specifies arbitrary linear transformation in two dimensions consisting of translation, independent X- and Y-scaling, rotation, and skewing with three calibration points. Use Affine when horizontal dimensions in a paper drawing are stretched with respect to vertical dimensions, and lines that are supposed to be parallel actually are parallel. The RMS (root mean square) error reported after calibration measures how close the program has come to making a perfect fit.
RMS Error Reports the RMS (root mean square) error, which measures how close the program has come to finding a perfect fit. The goal is the smallest RMS error. Standard Deviation Reports the standard deviation of the residuals. If it is near zero, the residual at each calibration point is about the same. Largest Residual/At Point Reports the point at which the mapping is least accurate.
After all interaction concerning tablet menus is complete, the following prompt is displayed: Do you want to respecify the screen pointing area? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter If you enter y, the following prompts are displayed: Digitize lower-left corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point Digitize upper-right corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point A small portion of the tablet's surface is designated as the fixed screen pointing area.
Controls whether multiple open drawings are displayed separately or grouped on the Windows taskbar. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter new value for Taskbar : ■ On Windows 7 systems, the default value is 1. ■ For all other Windows operating systems, the default value is 0. When TASKBAR is set to 1, drawings are displayed separately on the Windows taskbar. With Windows 7, preview images of each open drawing are displayed when the cursor is over the AutoCAD taskbar button.
Summary You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each text line is an independent object that you can move, format, or otherwise modify. Right-click in the text box to select options on the shortcut menu. If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing Enter at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for paper height and rotation angle. The text that you enter in the text box is placed directly beneath the previous line of text.
Justify Controls justification of the text. You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt. Align Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the baseline. The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer the text string, the shorter the characters. Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Middle Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you specify. Middle-aligned text does not rest on the baseline. The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders. The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters. Right Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point. TL (Top Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text.
MR (Middle Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. BL (Bottom Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. BC (Bottom Center) Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. BR (Bottom Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Text Shortcut Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Displays options available for creating and modifying single-line text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Opaque Background When checked, makes the background of the editor opaque. Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box. Select All Selects all the text in the single-line text object. Change Case Changes the case of selected text.
\U+2205 Diameter symbol ( ) Control Codes and Special Characters Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Summary In addition to using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you can also overscore text, underscore text, or insert a special character by including control information in the text string. Use a pair of percent signs to introduce each control sequence. You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD LT text fonts and Adobe PostScript fonts.
%%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (ý). %%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command only. Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the end of the text string. You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using the PostScript fonts. A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is provided in the sample folder.
List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select an annotation object: Select a text, mtext, or dimension object TEXTSCR Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window Opens the text window. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Views tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Text Window Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Text Window Command entry: 'textscr for transparent use Summary The Command prompt is displayed in a separate window.
TEXTTOFRONT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Brings text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing. Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel (expanded) ➤ Draw Order Drop-down ➤ Bring Text to Front Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel (expanded) ➤ Draw Order Drop-down ➤ Bring Dimensions to Front Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring Text and Dimensions to Front ➤ Text and Dimension Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format. Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A TIFF file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen.
Summary List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current time: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:54:51:406 AM Times for this drawing: Created: Friday, December 12, 2003 1:21:36:203 AM Last Updated: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:49:19:208 AM Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.520 Elapsed Timer (on): 0 days 00:07:05.312 Next Automatic Save In: 0 days 01:59:15.
TIMELINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Provides access to previous versions of the AutoCAD WS online copy of the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Timeline Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Timeline Toolbar: Online Summary The Timeline dialog box on page 1241 is displayed. You must save the drawing before you can continue with this command. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS.
Summary The timeline presents a visual representation of the history of any drawing uploaded to AutoCAD WS. A unique version is added to the timeline whenever the drawing is uploaded from AutoCAD or online edits are saved in AutoCAD WS, including changes resulting from collaboration sessions. Use the timeline to refer to previous versions of the drawing and track all changes. Users with whom you have shared the drawing can view the timeline. List of Options The following options are displayed.
TINSERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables Inserts a block in a table cell. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With a cell in a table selected, right-click and click Insert Block on the shortcut menu. Summary The Insert a Block in a Table Cell dialog box is displayed. Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select AutoFit to scale the block to fit in the selected cell. AutoFit Controls if the block reference should be scaled to fit in the select table cell, or if the height and width of the table cell should be adjusted to fit the block reference being inserted. Rotation Angle Specifies a rotation angle for the block. Overall Cell Alignment Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell.
Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout. Feature control frames can be created with leader lines using TOLERANCE, LEADER, or QLEADER. Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Tolerances Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame.
Sym Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol dialog box. The dialog box is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes. Tolerance 1 Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it.
First Box Creates the datum reference value. Second Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference. The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. Datum 2 Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference.
Datum Identifier Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder, or other geometry can serve as a datum. Symbol Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Tolerances Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form, profile, and runout.
Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic Type Concentricity or coaxiality Location Symmetry Location Parallelism Orientation Perpendicularity Orientation Angularity Orientation Cylindricility Form Flatness Form Circularity or roundness Form Straightness Form Profile of a surface Profile Profile of a line Profile Circular runout Runout Total runout Runout Symbol Dialog Box | 1249
Material Condition Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Tolerances Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size. Summary The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. TOOLBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Toolbars Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars.
Summary The Customize User Interface dialog box (see CUI) is displayed. If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, options are displayed. -TOOLBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Toolbars List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter toolbar name on page 1251 or [ALL on page 1252]: Enter a name or enter all Toolbar Name Specifies a toolbar to display, close, or position. Enter a valid toolbar name.
inquiry object_snap ucs Show Displays the specified toolbar. Hide Closes the specified toolbar. Left Docks the specified toolbar at the left side of the screen. Right Docks the specified toolbar at the right side of the screen. Top Docks the specified toolbar at the top of the screen. Bottom Docks the specified toolbar at the bottom of the screen. Enter New Position Sets the position of the toolbar in columns and rows relative to a toolbar dock. The first value is horizontal.
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Tool Palettes Toolbar: Standard Summary Use tool palettes to organize blocks, hatches, and custom tools in a tabbed window. Various options and settings are accessible from shortcut menus that display when you right-click different areas of the Tool Palettes window. NOTE Tool palettes can be used only in the version of the product in which they were created. For example, you cannot use a tool palette that was created in AutoCAD LT 2012 in AutoCAD LT 2007.
Delete Removes the selected tool from the tool palette. Delete Palette Removes the current palette. Dynamic Blocks Displays the palette tabs containing dynamic blocks. Move Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow. Move Up Moves the selected tool palette up one position. Move Down Moves the selected tool palette down one position. New Palette Creates a new palette. Enter a name or press Enter to use the default name. Paste Pastes a tool from the Clipboard to the current tab.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click a blank area or a tab on a tool palette and click View Options. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Size Controls the display size of the selected tool palette icon. View Style Controls the text displayed with a tool palette icon. Icon Only Displays the tool icon only. Icon with Text Displays the tool icon with the tool name below. List View Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right.
Summary The types of properties that are displayed will vary depending on the type of tool that is selected. In addition the following controls are displayed: List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Displays the icon of the selected tool. Name Displays the name of the selected tool. This can be edited. Description Displays a description of the selected tool. TOOLPALETTESCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images Closes the Tool Palettes window.
TPNAVIGATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize Tool Palettes Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify tool palette to display or [palette Group]: Enter a tool palette name, or enter g Tool Palette Name Displays the specified tool palette. Specifying a tool palette that is not part of the current group displays the specified palette and its palette group. Palette Group Displays the specified tool palette group.
Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and click Image ➤ Transparency. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select image(s): Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] : Enter an option or press Enter On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible. Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible. NOTE The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether dockable windows can be made transparent.
Tray Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Application Status Bar Controls the display of icons and notifications in the tray at the right end of the status bar. List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Icons from Services Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed. Display Notifications from Services Displays notifications from services.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Trim Menu: Modify ➤ Trim Toolbar: Modify Summary To trim objects, select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to trim. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select cutting edges...
Select the objects that define the cutting edges to which you want to trim an object, or press Enter to select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges. TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). NOTE To select cutting edges that include blocks, you can use only the single selection, Crossing, Fence, and Select All options.
None Specifies no projection. The command trims only objects that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space. UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space. View Specifies projection along the current view direction. The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view.
Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space. NOTE When trimming hatches, do not set Edge to Extend. If you do, gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches, even when the gap tolerance is set to a correct value. Erase Deletes selected objects.
1264
U Commands 21 U Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes Reverses the most recent operation. Access Methods Button Menu: Edit ➤ Undo Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Undo. Command entry: Ctrl+Z Summary You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session.
When an operation cannot be undone, the command name is displayed but no action is performed. Operations external to the current drawing, such as plotting or writing to a file, cannot be undone. If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command, their effects are undone, along with the effects of the main command. The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Origin of UCS on page 1267 or [Face on page 1267/NAmed on page 1268/OBject on page 1269/Previous on page 1269/View on page 1269/World on page 1269/X/Y/Z on page 1269/ZAxis on page 1271] : Specify Origin of UCS Defines a new UCS using one, two, or three points: ■ If you specify a single point, the origin of the current UCS shifts without changing the orientation of the X, Y, and Z axes.
Next Locates the UCS on either the adjacent face or the back face of the selected edge. Xflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the X axis. Yflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the Y axis. Accept Accepts the changes and places the UCS. 3D objects can be created in AutoCAD. Named Saves or restores named UCS definitions. TIP You can also right-click the UCS icon and click Named UCS to save or restore named UCS definitions. Restore Restores a saved UCS definition so that it becomes the current UCS.
Object Aligns the UCS to a selected 2D or 3D object. The UCS can be aligned with any object type except xlines and 3D polylines. Move the cursor over an object to see a preview of how the UCS will align, and click to place the UCS. In most cases, the UCS origin will be located at the endpoint that is nearest to the specified point, the X axis will align to an edge or tangent to a curve, and the Z axis will align perpendicular to the object. Previous Restores the previous UCS.
Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the X axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Y axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Z axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis.
Z Axis Aligns the UCS to a specified positive Z axis. The UCS origin is moved to the first point and its positive Z axis passes through the second point. Object Aligns the Z axis tangent to the endpoint that is nearest to the specified point. The positive Z axis points away from the object.
Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. Access Methods Button NOTE By default, the Coordinates panel is hidden in the Drafting & Annotation workspace. To display the Coordinates panel, click the View tab, then right-click and choose Show Panels, and then click Coordinates. Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ UCS Icon Properties Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ UCS Icon ➤ Properties Summary The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin/Selectable/Properties on page 1273]: Enter an option or press Enter On Displays the UCS icon. Off Turns off display of the UCS icon. All Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports. Otherwise, UCSICON affects only the current viewport. No Origin Displays the icon at the lower-left corner of the viewport regardless of the location of the UCS origin.
List of Options The following options are displayed. UCS Icon Style Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance. 2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z axis. 3D Displays a 3D icon. Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS icon is selected. Preview Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space. UCS Icon Size Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size.
Controls the color of the UCS icon in model space viewports. Layout Tab Icon Color Controls the UCS icon color in layout tabs. Apply Single Color Applies the selected Model space icon color to all axes of the 2D UCS icon. UCSMAN Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) Manages UCS definitions. Access Methods Button NOTE By default, the Coordinates panel is hidden in the Drafting & Annotation workspace.
UCS Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) Controls the UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. Summary Lists, renames, and restores user coordinate system (UCS) definitions, and controls UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. List of Tabs ■ Named UCSs on page 1276 ■ Orthographic UCSs on page 1277 ■ Settings on page 1279 Named UCSs Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Lists UCS definitions and sets the current UCS. Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS.
UCS Names List UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly. To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS command. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system.
Orthographic UCS Names Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list. ■ Name. Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system. ■ Depth. Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable.
Settings Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a viewport. UCS Icon Settings Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport. On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport. Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport.
Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) Specifies the depth for an orthographic UCS. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click in the Orthographic UCSs list. Click Depth. List of Options The following options are displayed. Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system.
Summary By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated relative to the world coordinate system. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the current named UCS. Origin Displays the UCS origin relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. X Axis Displays the values for the X axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Y Axis Displays the values for the Y axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Layers Shortcut menu: Select an underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF, PDF, or DGN Layers. Summary After selecting the underlay, the Underlay Layers dialog box is displayed. Underlay Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay Controls the display of layers in a DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay.
Turns the selected layers on and off. When a layer is on it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on. Name Displays the name of the layer. UNDO Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes Reverses the effect of commands. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Standard Summary UNDO displays the command or system variable name at the Command prompt to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was used.
Enter the number on page 1284 of operations to undo or [Auto on page 1284/Control on page 1284/BEgin/End on page 1284/Mark/Back on page 1285]: Enter a positive number, enter an option, or press Enter to undo a single operation Number Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same as entering u multiple times. Auto Groups the commands in a macro, such as a menu macro, into a single action, making them reversible by a single U command.
If you enter undo begin without undo end, using the Number option undoes the specified number of commands but does not back up past the begin point. If you want to go back to before the begin point, you must use the End option, even if the set is empty. The same applies to the U command. A mark placed by the Mark option disappears inside an UNDO group. Mark, Back Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done back to this mark.
UNGROUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Groups Disassociates the objects from a group. Access Methods Buo tn Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Groups ➤ Ungroup Menu: Tools ➤ Ungroup Toolbar: Group Summary The following prompts are displayed. Select group or [Name]: If a group contains sub-groups, you are promted to Accept to ungroup the current selection or choose Next to cycle through the groups in the selection set.
Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Region ➤ Union Summary You can combine two or more 2D regions into a single, composite region. Regions combine only with other region objects that are located on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous UNION actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes. UNION then produces separate, combined regions on each plane. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects Select the regions to be combined.
UNISOLATEOBJECTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Displays previously hidden objects. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. Summary Displays objects previously hidden with the ISOLATEOBJECTS on page 629 or HIDEOBJECTS on page 586 command. UNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Determine the Units of Measurement Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
Summary The format, precision, and other conventions to be used in displaying coordinates, distances, and angles are set and saved in drawing template files. These settings can also be changed in the current drawing file. The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed. If you enter -units at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Drawing Units Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Determine the Units of Measurement Controls the displayed precision and format for coordinates and angles.
Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit. Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements.
When prompted for an angle, you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise. Insertion Scale Controls the unit of measurement for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing. A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted. The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing.
Summary When prompted for an angle, you can locate a point in the desired direction or enter an angle. Base Angle Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. East Specifies the compass direction east (the default). North Specifies the compass direction north. West Specifies the compass direction west. South Specifies the compass direction south.
-UNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Determine the Units of Measurement Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Report formats: (Examples) 1. Scientific 1.55E+01 2. Decimal 15.50 3. Engineering 1'-3.50" 4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2" 5.
The next prompt is for the direction for angle 0: Direction for angle 0: East 3 o'clock = 0 North 12 o'clock = 90 West 9 o'clock = 180 South 6 o'clock = 270 Enter direction for angle 0 : Enter a value or press Enter The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 o'clock. The default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise.
UPDATETHUMBSNOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Manually updates thumbnail previews for named views, drawings, and layouts. Summary The UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable controls how the thumbnail previews are updated. The UPDATETHUMBSNOW command updates the following: ■ Sheets, sheet views, and model space views thumbnails in the Sheet Set Manager ■ Quick View images NOTE The thumbnail previews displayed in the Sheet Set Manager is not available in AutoCAD for Mac.
Ribbon: Online tab ➤ Upload panel ➤ Upload Menu: File ➤ AutoCAD WS ➤ Upload Toolbar: Online Summary The Upload Drawing dialog box on page 1296 is displayed. You must save the drawing before you can continue with this command. NOTE You may first be prompted to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on-screen instructions.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Auto-Upload Changes Controls whether to automatically upload the current drawing every time it is saved. Upload Now Uploads the current drawing. If the drawing has been previously uploaded, the current drawing replaces the latest version of the online copy. Hide Hides the dialog box. Use UPLOAD on page 1295 to redisplay the dialog box. Retry Reattempts to upload the drawing if previous attempt failed.
Choose Files to Upload Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Uploads selected files to AutoCAD WS. Summary The Choose Files to Upload dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box on page 826. Select up to 10 files from your local hard drive and network drives to upload to AutoCAD WS without opening them in AutoCAD. You can upload all types of files.
V Commands 22 VIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View Summary The View Manager on page 1300 is displayed. If you enter -view at the Command prompt, options are displayed. NOTE The VIEW command cannot be used transparently.
View Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Creates, sets, renames, modifies, and deletes named views, including model named views and camera views, layout views, and preset views. Summary List of Options The following options are displayed. Views Displays a list of the available views. You can expand each node (except for the Current node) to display its views. ■ Current. Displays the current view and its View and Clipping properties ■ Model Views.
■ Layout Views. Displays a list of viewports on a layout that define a view, and lists General and View properties for a selected view. ■ Preset Views. Displays a list of orthogonal and isometric views, and lists the General properties for a selected view. General The following properties are available: Name Displays the name of a selected camera, model, or layout view. UCS For model and layout views, displays the name of the user coordinate system saved with the named view.
Distance Up For model views only, displays the distance the camera can move upward. Applies to the Crane Up movement type. Distance Down For model views only, displays the distance the camera can move downward. Applies to the Crane Down movement type. Distance Forward For model views only, displays the distance the camera can move forward. Applies to the Crane Down movement type. Distance Back For model views only, displays the distance the camera can move backward. Applies to the Crane Up movement type.
Target Z For current and model views only, displays the Z coordinate of the view’s target. Roll angle Displays the rotation angle of the view within your viewing plane, which is a plane parallel to your monitor's screen. Height Specifies the height of the view. Width Specifies the width of the view. Perspective For current and model views, specifies whether perspective view is on. Lens Length (mm) For all views except layouts, specifies the lens length (in millimeters).
New View Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Creates a named view. List of Options The following options are displayed. View Name Specifies the view’s name. View Category Specifies a category for the named view. View Type Specifies the type of view for the named view. Recorded Walk is available for model space views only. Boundary Defines the area of the drawing that is assigned to the named view.
Uses the current display as the new view. Define Window Uses a window as the new view, which you define in the drawing area by specifying two opposite corners. Define View Window Button Temporarily closes the New View and View Manager dialog boxes so that you can use the pointing device to define the opposite corners of the New View window. Settings Provides options for saving settings with the named view. Save Layer Snapshot with View Saves the current layer visibility settings with the new named view.
The list includes the name of each specified view and the space in which it was defined. M designates model space, and P designates paper space. Delete Deletes one or more named views. Orthographic Restores the predefined orthographic view you specify to the current viewport. The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE system variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default.
UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved. (UCSVIEW system variable) Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view. Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view. However, plotting the view plots only the objects inside the window, not the entire viewport display.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ View Details Menu: File ➤ View Plot and Publish Details Summary The Plot and Publish Details dialog box is displayed. You can view detailed information about all completed plot and publish jobs, or just the errors that have occurred. You can also copy the information displayed in the dialog box to the Clipboard.
Summary Plot and publish details are also available through the Plot and Publish status bar icon shortcut menu. List of Options The following options are displayed. View Specifies what is displayed. You can also right-click in the details area and click View Errors Only or View All to change this setting. All Displays information about all completed plot and publish jobs and sheets within those jobs. Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were plotted or published.
Plot and Publish Status Bar Icon Shortcut Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Summary When background plotting is enabled, provides options for cancelling the sheet that is currently being plotted, cancelling the entire plot or publish job, viewing the Plot and Publish Details dialog box, and viewing the most recently ™ created Design Web Format (DWF ) file. Right-click any of the plot and publish icons in the tray on the right side of the status bar.
VIEWRES Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Views Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. Summary The model is regenerated. VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, splines, and arced polylines using short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon.
VPCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports Clips layout viewport objects and reshapes the viewport border. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Clip Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Viewport Toolbar: Viewports Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Viewport Clip. Summary You can either select an existing object to designate as the new boundary, or specify the points of a new boundary.
The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command. Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied.
Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. ■ All on page 1313 ■ Select on page 1313 ■ Current on page 1313 Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you want to plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.
Freeze Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted. ■ All on page 1313 ■ Select on page 1313 ■ Current on page 1313 ■ Except Current. Freezes specified layers in all viewports across all layouts, except in the current viewport. Thaw Thaws layers in specific viewports.
Expands the current layout viewport for editing. Access Methods Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Maximize Viewport Shortcut menu: Select a named layout viewport to mazimize. Right-click and click Maximize Viewport. Pointing device: Double-click a named layout viewport. Summary The viewport is expanded to fill the screen and switched to model space for editing. VPMIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport Restores the current layout viewport.
VPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles Sets the viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the drawing. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a view pointor [Rotate] : Specify a point, enter r, or press Enter to display a compass and axis tripod View Point Creates a vector that defines a direction from which the drawing can be viewed.
Compass and Axis Tripod Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport. The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a globe. The center point is the north pole (0,0,n), the inner ring is the equator (n,n,0), and the entire outer ring is the south pole (0,0,-n). As you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named Viewports Menu: View ➤ Viewports ➤ New Viewports, Named Viewports Toolbar: Layouts Summary The Viewports dialog box is displayed. If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Viewports Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a model space viewport configuration.
New Viewports Tab—Model Space (Viewports Dialog Box) New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration. If you do not enter a name, the viewport configuration is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout. Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations, including CURRENT, which is the current configuration.
Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard views.
Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list.
Creates multiple viewports in model space. Summary The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Save/Restore/Delete/Join/Single/?/2/3/4] <3>: Enter an option Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a specified name. Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration. Delete Deletes a named viewport configuration.
2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports. The Horizontal and Vertical options split the area into thirds. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed. 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size. -VPORTS - Layout Viewports Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports Creates multiple viewports in named (paper space) layouts.
Lock Locks the current viewport. This is similar to layer locking. Object Creates a nonrectangular layout viewport from a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain arcs as well as line segments. Polygonal Creates a nonrectangular layout viewport defined by a series of line and arc segments.
VSLIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ View Slides Displays an image slide file in the current viewport. Summary The Select Slide File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box, is displayed. To display a slide in a slide library (.slb extension), set FILEDIA to 0, enter vslide, and then specify the slide library file name followed by the slide file name enclosed in parentheses: slidelibrary (slide).
VTOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. Summary The View Transitions dialog box on page 1327 is displayed. View Transitions Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Controls when smooth view transitions are used. Summary Sets the options for smooth view transitions. List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom Makes a smooth view transition during panning and zooming.
Performance Set the minimum speed for a smooth view transition in frames per second. When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used to preserve performance.
W Commands 23 WBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block Definition panel ➤ Write Block Summary The Write Block dialog box is displayed. Entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by command prompts.
Write Block Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks Saves selected objects or converts a block to a specified drawing file. Summary The Write Block dialog box provides a convenient method for saving part of the current drawing to a different drawing file, or saving a specified block definition as a separate drawing file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Source Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion points.
Selects current drawing to save as another file. Objects Selects objects to save as a file. Specify a base point and select objects below. Base Point Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0. Pick Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point.
Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected. Destination Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted. File Name and Path Specifies a file name and path where the block or objects will be saved. [...] Displays a standard file selection dialog box.
In the new drawing, the world coordinate system (WCS) is set parallel to the user coordinate system (UCS). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of output file: Enter name of existing block or [= (block=output file)/* (whole drawing)] : Existing Block Writes that block to a file. You cannot enter the name of an external reference (xref) or one of its dependent blocks. = Specifies that the existing block and the output file have the same name.
The information displayed by WHOHAS is stored in a temporary DWL (drawing lock) file. A DWL file is deleted when the file is closed. WIPEOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Wipeout Menu: Draw ➤ Wipeout Summary Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color.
Specify first point on page 1335 or [Frames on page 1335/Polyline on page 1335] . First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points. Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are displayed or hidden. Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout objects from a selected polyline. Erase Polyline Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the wipeout object. Enter n to retain the polyline.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify insertion point on page 1336 or [Scale on page 1336/X on page 1336/Y on page 1336/Z on page 1336/Rotate on page 1336/PScale on page 1337/PX on page 1337/PY on page 1337/PZ on page 1337/PRotate on page 1337]: Specify a point or enter an option Insertion Point Places a copy of the metafile with its base point at the specified insertion point. X Scale Factor Sets the X and Y scale factors.
PScale Sets the temporary scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor on page 1336 ■ Corner on page 1336 ■ XYZ on page 1336 PX Sets the temporary scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into position.
WMFOPTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert WMF Files Sets options for WMFIN. Summary The WMF In Options dialog box is displayed. WMF In Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert WMF Files Controls whether metafiles maintain relative line widths and whether they are imported as wireframes or solid objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Wire Frame (No Fills) Imports objects as wireframes. If you clear this option, objects are imported as filled objects.
Maintains the relative line width of lines and borders. If you clear this option, lines are imported with zero width. WMFOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export WMF Files Saves objects to a Windows metafile. Summary The Create WMF standard file selection dialog box is displayed. WORKSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Creates, modifies, and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Delete Deletes a workspace. Settings Opens the Workspace Settings dialog box on page 1341, which controls the display, menu order, and Save settings of a workspace. ?—List Workspaces Lists all workspaces defined in the main and enterprise CUIx files. WSSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Saves a workspace. Summary If you enter -wssave at the Command prompt, WSSAVE displays prompts. The Save Workspace dialog box is displayed.
files, such as CUIx files that are shared across a network (called enterprise CUIx files), are displayed with a “Read-Only” file name extension. WSSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Sets options for workspaces. Summary The Workspace Settings dialog box is displayed. Workspace Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Controls the display, menu order, and Save settings of a workspace.
with a check mark in the toolbar and menu) and the workspace you've defined in the My Workspace= option, regardless of the display settings. Move Up Moves workspace names up in the display order. Move Down Moves workspace names down in the display order. Add Separator Adds a separator between workspace names.
X Commands 24 XATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ DWG Reference Toolbar: Reference Summary When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
After the files are attached, you can adjust and clip the xref through the External Reference ribbon contextual tab. Attach External Reference Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Attaches drawings as an external reference (xref). Summary If you attach a drawing that contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing. You can select multiple DWG files to attach. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested.
Name Identifies the DWG you have selected to attach. Browse Displays the Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a new external reference for the current drawing. Preview Displays the DWG you have selected to attach. Reference Type Specifies whether the external reference is an attachment or an overlay.
Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Path Type Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the external reference file, or No Path, the name of the external reference (the file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file). Rotation Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or at the Command prompt.
External Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Displays options for attaching external references. Summary The External Reference tab is displayed when you select an external reference. List of Options The following options are displayed. Edit Panel Edit Reference In-Place (REFEDIT on page 1072) Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.
XBIND Quick Reference See also: ■ Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ External Reference ➤ Bind Toolbar: Reference Summary The Xbind dialog box is displayed. If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, options are displayed. NOTE The Bind option of XREF binds the xref file. Use XBIND for individual dependent definitions.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing. Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the named object definitions in the attached xref. Definitions to Bind Lists the xref-dependent named object definitions to bind to the host drawing. Add Moves the named object definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter symbol type to bind [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Style]: Enter an option Depending on the option, you are prompted for a xref-dependent named object (symbol) such as a block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style. Enter dependent Symbol name(s): Enter a name list or * to bind all xref-dependent named objects (symbols) from that definition table The name you specify must be the full name, including the vertical bar character ( | ).
Ribbon: Inset tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip. Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Xref Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an xref. Right-click in the drawing area and click Clip Xref. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an xref or block instance that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the XCLIPFRAME system variable. TIP Use the generic CLIP command to clip images, external references, viewports, and underlays.
Generate Polyline Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings. Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Construction Line Menu: Draw ➤ Construction Line Toolbar: Draw Summary Lines that extend to infinity, such as xlines, can be used to create construction and reference lines, and for trimming boundaries. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a point on page 1353 or [Hor on page 1353/Ver on page 1353/Ang on page 1354/Bisect on page 1354/Offset on page 1354. Point Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes.
The xline is created parallel to the Y axis. Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle. Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line. Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line. Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line. The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points.
XOPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. Summary Opens a selected drawing reference in a separate window for editing. If the selected reference contains nested xrefs, Open Reference Files dialog box on page 1355 is displayed where you can specify which xref to open.
Summary The Open Reference Files dialog box, displays a reference tree showing all nested xrefs. The source file for the selected xref opens in a separate drawing window, where you can edit, save, and then close the drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Reference Name Displays a reference tree of all nested xrefs for a specified reference. Highlight Selected Reference Highlights the selected xrefs in the drawing area. Preview Displays a preview of the selected reference. Zoom To...
Temporarily closes the Open Reference Files dialog box and zooms the view in the drawing area to the selected reference. Press Enter to redisplay the dialog box. Open Opens the source file for the selected reference in a separate window. XPLODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) Breaks a compound object into its component objects. Summary Reports how many objects were selected and, of those, how many objects cannot be exploded.
Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them. ■ Enter bylayer to inherit the color of the exploded object's layer. ■ Enter byblock to inherit the color of the exploded object. ■ Enter t for a true color to be used for the selected object. ■ Enter co for a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Layer Sets the layer of the component objects after you explode them. The default option is to inherit the current layer rather than the layer of the exploded object.
Summary The External References palette is displayed. If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Bind Xrefs/DGN Underlays Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Converts DWG references (xrefs) and DGN Underlays to standard local block definitions. Summary If you bind an xref into the current drawing, the xref and all its dependent named objects become a part of the current drawing.
For example, if you have an xref named FLOOR1 containing a layer named WALL, after binding the xref, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL becomes a locally defined layer named FLOOR1$0$WALL. The number in $n$ is automatically increased if a local named object with the same name already exists. In this example, if FLOOR1$0$WALL already existed in the drawing, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL would be renamed FLOOR1$1$WALL.
two dollar signs ($). The number is increased if the same name already exists in the current drawing. Detach Detaches one or more DWG references from your drawing, erasing all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the definition table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. Path Displays and edits the path name associated with a particular DWG reference.
Scale Sets the scale factor. All X and Y dimensions of the xref are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The xref is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. X, Y, and Z Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors. ■ X Scale Factor. Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the xref. ■ Corner. Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale.
Z Commands 25 ZOOM Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Realtime Menu: View ➤ Zoom ➤ Realtime Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time. Summary You can change the magnification of a view by zooming in and out, which is similar to zooming in and out with a camera.
In a perspective view, ZOOM displays the 3DZOOM prompts. NOTE You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or while ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW is in progress. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All on page 1364/Center/Dynamic/Extents on page 1365/Previous/Scale/Window/Object] All Zooms to display all visible objects and visual aids.
Dynamic Pans and zooms using a rectangular view box. The view box represents your view, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the view inside the view box. Not available in perspective projection. ■ To change the size of the view box, click, resize it, and click again to accept the new size of the view box. ■ To pan with the view box, drag it to the location you want and press Enter.
Scale Zooms to change the magnification of a view using a scale factor. ■ Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view. ■ Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units. For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen. Entering .5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units. You can create a layout with each viewport displaying objects at a different scale.
Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command. Real Time Zooms interactively to change the magnification of the view. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs. See Zoom Shortcut Menu on page 1367 for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels ZOOM or PAN. Pan Switches to PAN. Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.
Command Modifiers 26 You can use command modifiers to help you locate points or select objects while a command is in progress. Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From, MTP, and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode command modifiers at any prompt that requires object selection.
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Direct Distances Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last point you entered. At any prompt for a point location, you move the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance.
At a prompt for locating a point, enter from, and then enter a temporary reference or base point from which you can specify an offset to locate the next point. Enter the offset location from this base point as a relative coordinate, or use direct distance entry. NOTE You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command.
At any prompt to locate a point, enter tracking, track, or tk. First tracking point: Specify a location or distance Next point (Press ENTER to end tracking): Specify a second location or distance Tracking specifies a series of temporary points, each offset from the previous one. Thus, you specify a new point location from a series of directions and distances. To determine the location of each temporary point, you can use direct distance entry.
You can specify an object snap with any of the following methods: ■ Enter a object snap by typing its name. To see a list of valid object snaps, refer to the OSNAP on page 893 command or the Drafting Settings Dialog Box on page 414. ■ Click an object snap from the Object Snap toolbar. ■ Click an object snap from the Object Snap shortcut menu. You can diisplay this shortcut menu by pressing SHIFT while you right-click.
1374
System Variables AutoCAD LT® stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables. You can examine any system variable and change any writable system variable directly at the command prompt by entering the system variable name or by using the SETVAR command. Many system variables are also accessible through dialog box options. To access a list of system variables, on the Contents tab of the Help window, click the + sign next to System Variables.
1376
3D System Variables 27 3DSELECTIONMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects Individually Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the selection precedence of both visually and physically overlapping objects when using 3D visual styles. 0 Use legacy 3D selection precedence. 1 Use line-of-sight 3D selection precedence for selecting 3D solids and surfaces. Also, a defining object associated with a surface is given selection precedence with this setting.
1378
A System Variables 28 ADCSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Content with DesignCenter (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. For developers who need to determine status through AutoLISP.
AFLAGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 16 Sets options for attributes. The value is the sum of the following: 0 No attribute mode selected 1 Invisible 2 Constant 4 Verify 8 Preset 16 Lock position in block 32 Multiple lines ANGBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.
Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the direction of positive angles. Angle values are measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the current UCS.
1 All annotative objects are displayed The ANNOALLVISIBLE setting is saved individually for model space and each layout. NOTE When ANNOALLVISIBLE is set to 1, annotative objects that support more than one scale will only display one . ANNOAUTOSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Annotation Scale Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: -4 Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed.
4 Adds the newly set annotation scale to all annotative objects that support the current scale. ANNOTATIVEDWG Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative NOTE The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects.
The aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. 0 Off 1 On APERTURE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Snaps Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. Enter a value (1-50). The higher the number, the larger the target box.
Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Applies transparency settings to all palettes. 0 Transparency settings off 1 Transparency settings on This system variable determines the default setting for the Transparency dialog box > Apply these settings to all palettes option on page 889.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects. 0 Off 1 On AREA Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. This system variable has the same name as a command.
Initial value: 0 Specifies the default array type. 0 Rectangular array 1 Path array 2 Polar array ATTDIA Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry.
Controls the which Text Formatting toolbar is used with the in-place editor for modifying multiline attributes. 0 Displays the abbreviated Text Formatting toolbar with the in-place editor 1 Displays the full Text Formatting toolbar with the in-place editor Use the abbreviated Text Formatting toolbar with the in-place editor when modifying multiline attributes for best compatibility with releases prior to AutoCAD LT 2008.
ATTMULTI Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. 0 Turns off all access methods for creating multiline attributes. They can still be viewed and edited. 1 Turns on all access methods for creating multiline attributes.
AUDITCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file. 0 Prevents writing of ADT files 1 Writes ADT files AUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Unit Format Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets units for angles.
AUPREC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Unit Format Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. However, the internal precision of angular values and and coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. AUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE on page 361). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8.
AUTOCOMPLETEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ The Command Line Window Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 15 Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether DWF (Design Web Format) files are created automatically when you save or close drawing (DWG) files. 0 Turns off automatic publishing to DWF files when a drawing is saved or closed 1 Turns on automatic publishing to DWF files when a drawing is saved or closed The AUTOPUBLISH command controls additional options. NOTE This command will be removed in a future release.
AUTOSNAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 63 Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Also turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode tooltips. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet.
B System Variables 29 BACKGROUNDPLOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. By default, background plotting is turned off for plotting and on for publishing.
BACTIONBARMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Group Related Actions in Dynamic Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the action bars or the legacy action objects are displayed in the Block Editor. 0 Legacy action objects are displayed in the Block Editor. 1 Action bars are displayed in the Block Editor. NOTE The BACTIONSET,BASSOCIATE, and BLOOKUPTABLE on page 142 commands are disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE system variable is set to 1.
BCONSTATUSMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Turns the constraint display status on and off and controls the shading of objects based on their constraint level. When the display status is on, objects are shaded based on whether they are partially constrained, fully constrained, over constrained, or not constrained.
Controls whether or not dependent objects are dependency highlighted when a parameter, action, or grip is selected in the Block Editor. 0 Specifies that dependent objects are not highlighted 1 Specifies that dependent objects are highlighted Dependency highlighting displays objects with a halo effect. BGRIPOBJCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions and Parameters Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: 141 Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor.
BLIPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether marker blips are visible. Obsolete Marker blips have been removed from the product. This system variable has the same name as the BLIPMODE command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
When BLOCKEDITLOCK is set to 1, double-clicking a dynamic block in a drawing opens the Properties palette. Double-click actions can be customized using the Double Click Actions. 0 Specifies that the Block Editor can be opened 1 Specifies that the Block Editor cannot be opened BLOCKEDITOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open.
Indicates whether or not a test block window is current. The BLOCKTESTWINDOW system variable controls the display of the contextual panel that is displayed when a test block window is current. When the test block window is current, this system variable is set to 1, otherwise it is set to 0. BPARAMETERCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions and Parameters Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: 170 Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETERSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions and Parameters Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 12 Sets the size of parameter text and features in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. Valid values include an integer from 1 to 255.
BTMARKDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions and Parameters Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references.
1404
C System Variables 30 CALCINPUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1:1 Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. You can only enter a named scale that exists in the drawing’s named scale list. CANNOSCALEVALUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Annotation Scale (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Returns the value of the current annotation scale.
CDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in decimal format. The date and time displays in a decimal format starting with the year. After the decimal point, CDATE displays the time using a 24-hour clock. For example, the ninth day of February in the year 2006 at 3:05 pm displays as 20060209.150500.
■ Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE or custom color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" CELTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Linetype Scale Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. Sets the linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE on page 712 command setting. A line created with CELTSCALE = 2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.
CELWEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Lineweight Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -1 Sets the lineweight of new objects. -1 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER." -2 Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK." -3 Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable. Other valid values entered in hundredths of millimeters include 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211.
CENTERMT does not apply to stretching multiline text by using the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor.
CHAMFERA Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERB Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERC Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
CHAMFERD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the default circle radius. A zero indicates no default. CLASSICKEYS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the behavior of the AutoCAD LT shortcut keys. 0 To copy, press Ctrl+C 1 To cancel, press Ctrl+C CLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the current layer.
CLEANSCREENSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Toolbars (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. 0 Off 1 On CLISTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the Command Line is open or closed.
CLIPBOARD Quick Reference See also: ■ Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates the status of the Clipboard. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Nothing available 1 ASCII text format available 2 AutoCAD LT format available 4 Windows metafile format available For information about using CLIPBOARD in a DIESEL expression, see DIESEL Expressions in Macros in the Customization Guide.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No active command 1 Ordinary command is active 2 Transparent command is active 4 Script is active 8 Dialog box is active 16 DDE is active 32 AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-defined command) 64 ObjectARX command is active CMDDIA Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the In-Place Text Editor for the LEADER and
CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. Display of the history of user input is controlled by the INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable.
CMLEADERSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the name of the current multileader style. CONSTRAINTBARMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4095 Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
128 Concentric 256 Colinear 512 Symmetric 1024 Equal 2048 Fix For example, set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 12 (8+4) to display parallel and perpendicular constraints on the constraint bars. Set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 4095 to display constraint bars for all constraint types. CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
CONSTRAINTRELAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object. 0 Maintains constraints 1 Relaxes constraints Use this system variable when you run scripts and want to relax any constraints.
When the CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE is set to 0, resizing a constrained line may result in unpredictable behavior. CONTENTEXPLORERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Content Explorer ■ DesignCenter (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Content Explorer window is open or closed.
1 The absolute coordinates of your pointing device is updated continuously 2 The absolute coordinates of your pointing device is updated continuously except when a point, distance, or angle is requested. In that case, relative polar coordinates are displayed instead of X and Y. The Z values always display as absolute coordinates. 3 The absolute coordinates (WCS) of your pointing device is updated continuously with the latitude and longitude coordinate values of the geographic location.
Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ByColor Controls the current plot style for new objects. If the current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode, CPLOTSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR. If the current drawing is in named plot styles mode, CPLOTSTYLE can be set to the following values (BYLAYER is the default): "BYLAYER" "BYBLOCK" "NORMAL" "USER DEFINED" To convert the current drawing to use named or color-dependent plot styles, use CONVERTPSTYLES.
CTAB Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Model Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. Provides a means for the user to determine which layout is active. CTABLESTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the name of the current table style.
Initial value: 5 Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen.
1426
D System Variables 31 DATALINKNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the notification for updated or missing data links. 0 Disables data link update notification. 1 Enables data link notification. Notifies you that external data is linked to the current drawing by displaying the data link icon in the lower-right corner of the application window (the notification area of the status bar tray).
DATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. This value is represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the format: .
■ Modify Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. Double click actions can be customized using the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor. The system variable can accept the values of On and Off in place of 1 and 0. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DBMOD Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates the drawing modification status.
The DBMOD value is reset to 0 when you save the drawing. DCTCUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Displays the path and file name of the current custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies by country/region Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary.
enc Canadian English cat Catalan csy Czech dan Danish nld Dutch (primary) fin Finnish fra French (accented capitals) frc French (unaccented capitals) deu German (post-reform) deo German (pre-reform) ita Italian nor Norwegian (Bokmal) ptb Portuguese (Brazilian) ptg Portuguese (Iberian) rus Russian esp Spanish sve Swedish DCTMAIN | 1431
DEFLPLSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plot Styles Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: ByColor Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0 when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFLPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.
PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0 (named plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value of “BYLAYER.” To convert the current drawing to use named or color-dependent plot styles, use CONVERTPSTYLES. DELOBJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted. 0 All defining geometry is retained.
Determines whether DGN underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the DGNFRAME setting. Use the DGNFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the DGN frame settings. 0 The DGN underlay frame is not displayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. 1 The DGN underlay frame is displayed amd plotted. 2 The DGN underlay frame is displayed but not plotted.
DGNIMPORTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls the default behavior of the DGNIMPORT command. 0 Imports the DGN file in a new drawing file. 1 Imports the DGN file into the currently open drawing and ignores duplicate named objects. 2 Imports the DGN file into the currently open drawing and adds a prefix to all named objects with the DGN filename.
DGNOSNAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Snaps with Underlays Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DGN underlays that are attached to the drawing. The UOSNAP system variable overrides the DGNOSNAP setting.
NOTE The DIASTAT system variable does not apply to standard file selection dialog boxes, such as the Select File and the Save Drawing As dialog boxes. DIGITIZER Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Identifies digitizers connected to the system.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions. -1 Angular dimensions display the number of decimal places specified by DIMDEC. 0-8 Specifies the number of decimal places displayed in angular dimensions (independent of DIMDEC) DIMALT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTD sets the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the alternate measurement. DIMALTF Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 25.4000 (imperial) or 0.0394 (metric) Controls the multiplier for alternate units.
DIMALTTD Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTTZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
8 Suppresses trailing zeros DIMALTU Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular.
DIMALTZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMALTZ values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not the current dimension style is annotative. 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative DIMAPOST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension measurement for all types of dimensions except angular. For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT is on, DIMALTF is 25.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. 0 Places arc length symbols before the dimension text 1 Places arc length symbols above the dimension text 2 Suppresses the display of arc length symbols DIMASSOC Quick Reference See also: ■ Associative Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. 0 Creates exploded dimensions.
ciation point on the geometric object moves, the dimension location, orientation, and value are updated. DIMASSOC is not stored in a dimension style. Drawings saved in a format previous to AutoCAD 2002 retain the setting of the DIMASSOC system variable. When the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2002 or later, the dimension associativity setting is restored. DIMASZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 2.
Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. 0 Places both text and arrows outside extension lines 1 Moves arrows first, then text 2 Moves text first, then arrows 3 Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits best A leader is added to moved dimension text when DIMTMOVE is set to 1.
DIMAZIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Suppress Zeros in Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions. 0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros 1 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 2 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 3 Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes are shown below. You can also enter the names of user-defined arrowhead blocks. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
"_CLOSEDBLANK" closed blank "_DATUMFILLED" datum triangle filled "_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle "_INTEGRAL" integral "_ARCHTICK" architectural tick DIMBLK1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK.
DIMBLK2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
>0 Center marks are drawn The absolute value specifies the size of the center mark or centerline. The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark.
Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256. DIMCLRT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Assigns colors to dimension text. The color can be any valid color number. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Quick Reference Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
DIMDEC Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension. The precision is based on the units or angle format you have selected. Specified value is applied to angular dimensions when DIMADEC on page 1437 is set to -1. DIMDLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.
DIMDLI Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.3800 (imperial) or 3.7500 (metric) Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Each dimension line is offset from the previous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid drawing over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not applied to existing dimensions.
DIMEXE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 1.2500 (metric) Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line. DIMEXO Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0625 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. With fixed-length extension lines, this value determines the minimum offset.
Initial value: 0 Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional). 0 Horizontal stacking 1 Diagonal stacking 2 Not stacked (for example, 1/2) DIMFXL Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin.
DIMGAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0900 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line created with the LEADER command. If you enter a negative value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension text. DIMGAP is also used as the minimum length for pieces of the dimension line.
Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point is located off the page. Valid settings range is 5 to 90. DIMJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies the arrow type for leaders. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK on page 1447. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. DIMLFAC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
DIMLIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Generates dimension limits as the default text. Setting DIMLIM to On turns DIMTOL off. Off Dimension limits are not generated as default text On Dimension limits are generated as default text DIMLTEX1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the first extension line.
DIMLTEX2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the second extension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. DIMLTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the dimension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (always displayed stacked) 5 Fractional (always displayed stacked) 6 Microsoft Windows Desktop (decimal format using Control Panel settings for decimal separator and number grouping symbols) DIMLWD Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to dimension lines.
DIMLWE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to extension lines. -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm. DIMPOST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: None Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement.
Use <> to indicate placement of the text in relation to the dimension value. For example, enter <>mm to display a 5.0 millimeter radial dimension as "5.0mm". If you entered mm <>, the dimension would be displayed as "mm 5.0". Use the <> mechanism for angular dimensions. DIMRND Quick Reference See also: ■ Round Off Dimension Values Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value. For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.
DIMSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Also affects the leader objects with the LEADER command. Use MLEADERSCALE to scale multileader objects created with the MLEADER command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the first extension line and the text. Off First dimension line is not suppressed On First dimension line is suppressed DIMSD2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead.
Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the first extension line. Off Extension line is not suppressed On Extension line is suppressed DIMSE2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the second extension line.
Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. Off Arrowheads are not suppressed On Arrowheads are suppressed If not enough space is available inside the extension lines and DIMTIX is on, setting DIMSOXD to On suppresses the arrowheads. If DIMTIX is off, DIMSOXD has no effect.
Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. 0 Centers the dimension text between the extension lines. 1 Places the dimension text above the dimension line except when the dimension line is not horizontal and text inside the extension lines is forced horizontal (DIMTIH = 1). The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current DIMGAP value.
DIMTFAC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. For example, if DIMTFAC is set to 1.0, the text height of fractions and tolerances is the same height as the dimension text. If DIMTFAC is set to 0.7500, the text height of fractions and tolerances is three-quarters the size of dimension text.
DIMTFILLCLR Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
DIMTIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Draws text between extension lines. Off For linear and angular dimensions, dimension text is placed inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room. On Draws dimension text between the extension lines even if it would ordinarily be placed outside those lines. For radius and diameter dimensions, DIMTIX on always forces the dimension text outside the circle or arc.
For DIMTM, the program uses the negative of the value you enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive number and a plus sign if you specify a negative number). DIMTMOVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets dimension text movement rules.
For radius and diameter dimensions, a dimension line is drawn inside the circle or arc when the text, arrowheads, and leader are placed outside.
Appends tolerances to dimension text. Setting DIMTOL to on turns DIMLIM off. DIMTOLJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 0 (metric) Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative to the nominal dimension text. This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off.
Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTP accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn. If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive. DIMTSZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.
Initial value: 0.0000 Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. The DIMTVP value is used when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical offset of text is the product of the text height and DIMTVP. Setting DIMTVP to 1.0 is equivalent to setting DIMTAD to on. The dimension line splits to accommodate the text only if the absolute value of DIMTVP is less than 0.7.
DIMTXTDIRECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. 0 Displays dimension text in a Left-to-Right reading style 1 Displays dimension text in a Right-to-Left reading style DIMTZIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5) DIMUPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls options for user-positioned text.
Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only: 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches 1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.
1 On. Display silhouette edges When turned on, DISPSILH also suppresses the mesh displayed when using the HIDE command with SHADEMODE set to 2D wireframe. Use the REGEN command to display the results. DISTANCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the distance computed by the DIST command. DONUTID Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Donuts Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.
DONUTOD Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Donuts Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. The value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next command. DRAGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of objects being dragged. This system variable has the same name as a command.
2 Auto; always displays an outline of the object as you drag it DRAGP1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5000 When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. A larger number results in more graphical vectors being displayed as objects are dragged.
A larger number results in more graphical vectors being displayed as objects are dragged. For best performance, it is recommended that you use hardware acceleration rather than software acceleration. DRAGP2 has no effect when dragging objects in a 3D viewport. DRAWORDERCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are created or edited.
NOTE Full draw order display may slow some editing operations. DRSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Recover from a System Failure (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Drawing Recovery Manager window is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open DTEXTED Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. Obsolete command.
DWFFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Determines whether DWF or DWFx underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the DWFFRAME setting. Use the DWFFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the DWF frame settings 0 The DWF or DWFx underlay frame is not visible and it is not plotted.
Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DWF or DWFx underlays that are attached to the drawing. The UOSNAP system variable overrides the DWFOSNAP setting.
DWGCODEPAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Text Fonts for International Work (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the same value as SYSCODEPAGE (for compatibility reasons). DWGNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Drawing1.dwg Stores the name of the current drawing. If a new drawing has not been saved yet, DWGNAME defaults to Drawing1.dwg. Additional new drawings are named Drawing2.dwg, Drawing3.
DWGPREFIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing. DWGTITLED Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the current drawing has been named.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. 0 Keeps constraints hidden when an object is selected 1 Displays hidden constraints when dimensionally constrained objects are selected NOTE This system variable takes effect when dynamic constraints are hidden (see DCDISPLAY on page 271).
16 Arc radius dimension The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNDIVIS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing. DYNDIGRIP controls which dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether tips are displayed for using Shift and Ctrl when editing with grips. When dynamic input is turned on and you select a grip, a tip at the cursor lists the available grip options that you can cycle through using Shift or Ctrl.. 0 Hide the Shift and Ctrl tips 1 Display the Shift and Ctrl tips This setting is on the Dynamic Input tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box.
If dynamic prompts are on (DYNPROMPT is set to 1), they are displayed when DYNMODE is set to 1, 2, or 3. When dimensional input is turned on (DYNMODE = 2 or 3), the program switches to pointer input when you enter a comma or an angle bracket (<), or when you select multiple grip points. When DYNMODE is set to 1, 2, or 3, you can turn off all features temporarily by holding down the temporary override key, F12. Settings are on the Dynamic Input tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. This setting applies only to a second or next point. 0 Polar 1 Cartesian The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNPIVIS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls when pointer input is displayed.
DYNPROMPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips. 0 Off 1 On The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When DYNMODE is set to 0 (off), prompts are not displayed regardless of the DYNPROMPT setting.
1496
E System Variables 32 EDGEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Trim or Extend Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. 0 Uses the selected edge without any extensions 1 Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects eligible for natural extension.
ELEVATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. ERHIGHLIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the External References palette or in the drawing window.
ERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the External References palette is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open EXEDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Displays the folder path of the AutoCAD LT executable file.
EXPERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether certain prompts are issued. 0 Issues all prompts normally. 1 Suppresses “About to regen, proceed?” and “Really want to turn the current layer off?” (-LAYER) 2 Suppresses the preceding prompts and “Block already defined. Redefine it?” (-BLOCK) and “A drawing with this name already exists. Overwrite it?” (SAVE or WBLOCK).
EXPLMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks. 0 Does not explode NUS blocks 1 Explodes NUS blocks EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Sets the default electronic file output type: PDF, DWF, or DWFx.
EXPORTMODELSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Model Space and Paper Space Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space 0 Display 1 Extents 2 Window EXPORTPAPERSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Model Space and Paper Space Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from paper space.
EXPORTPAGESETUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. 0 Current - Exports the file using the DWG’s current page setup. When this is set to 0, the Page Setup combo box in the Export to DWF/PDF panel of the Ribbon’s Output tab displays Current. 1 Override - Exports the file and allows you to override the DWG’s current page setup.
Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space. EXTMIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space.
1 Uses AutoCAD 2000 (and later releases) parameters. Names can be up to 255 characters in length, and can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, spaces, and any special characters not used by the operating system and AutoCAD LT for other purposes.
1506
F System Variables 33 FACETRES Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000 Adjusts the smoothness of shaded objects and objects with hidden lines removed. Valid values are from 0.01 to 10.0. When you use the 3DPRINT command, the FACTRES system variable is set to 10.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. The background is not plotted. 0 Fields are displayed with no background 1 Fields are displayed with a gray background FIELDEVAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Fields Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 31 Controls how fields are updated.
FILEDIA Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes. 0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~) in response to the command's prompt. 1 Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script is active, an ordinary prompt is displayed.
FILLETRAD3D Quick Reference See also: ■ Fillet a Surface ■ Modify Edges on 3D Objects Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. Stores the default radius for 3D solid and surface fillets created with the FILLETEDGE and SURFFILLET commands. If you change the radius while using the FILLETEDGE or SURFFILLET commands, the FILLETRAD system variable does not update to this new value.
FONTALT Quick Reference See also: ■ Substitute Fonts Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: simplex.shx Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. When a drawing file with a defined text style is opened and an alternate font is not specified, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed. FONTMAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Substitute Fonts Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: acadlt.fmp Specifies the font mapping file to be used.
FONTMAP only works with text created through the MTEXT command. FRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames ■ Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the display of frames for all images, underlays, and clipped xrefs. The FRAME setting overrides the individual IMAGEFRAME, DWFFRAME, PDFFRAME, DGNFRAME, and XCLIPFRAME settings. 0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted.
FRAMESELECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames ■ Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the frame of an image, underlay, or clipped xref can be selected. 0 Hidden frames cannot be selected. 1 Hidden frames can be selected.
1 Sends the full path of the drawing file 1514 | Chapter 33 F System Variables
34 G System Variables GEOLATLONGFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the format of the latitude or longitude values in the Geographic Location dialog box, and the coordinate status bar in Geographic mode.
GEOMARKERVISIBILITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the visibility of geographic markers. 0 Geographic marker is not visible 1 Geographic marker is visible GFANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Valid values range from 0 to less than 360 (degrees).
GFCLR1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "Blue" Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill.
■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard color books, guides, or sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" GFCLRLUM Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. A tint gradient transitions toward white and a shade gradient transitions toward black. Valid values range from 0.0 (darkest) to 1.
GFNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. 0 Centered 1 Shifted up and to the left GLOBALOPACITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Transparency Dialog Box on page 888 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Controls transparency level for all palettes. 0 Fully transparent 100 Fully opaque Enter a value from 0-100 to set the transparency level.
GRIDDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the display limits of the grid.
Initial value: 5 Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Valid values range from 1 to 100. Grid lines are displayed when SHADEMODE is set to Hidden. GRIDMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.
The setting is stored as an integer using the sum of the following values: 0 Displays lined grid for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout. 1 Displays dotted grid for 2D model space. 2 Displays dotted grid for Block Editor. 4 Displays dotted grid for Sheet and Layout. GRIDUNIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000,0.
Controls the display of grips in blocks. 0 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block 1 Assigns grips to objects within the block GRIPCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Grips ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 869 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Controls the color of unselected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.
GRIPDYNCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 140 Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks. The valid range is 1 to 255. GRIPHOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Grips ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 869 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 12 Controls the color of selected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.
■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 869 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 11 Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. The valid range is 1 to 255. GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Method to Modify Objects ■ Modify Objects Using Grips Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
GRIPOBJLIMIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Grips ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 869 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 0 to 32,767. For example, when set to 1, grips are suppressed when more than one object is selected. When set to 0, grips are always displayed.
To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use GRIPSIZE. GRIPSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Grips ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 869 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5 Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is 1 to 255.
1 Turns on the display of grip tips. GROUPDISPLAYMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects in Groups Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on. 0 Displays grips on all objects in the selected group 1 Displays a single grip at the center of the grouped objects 2 Displays the group bounding box with a single grip at the center Group selection is enabled by setting the PICKSTYLE on page 1612 system variable to 1 or 3.
1530
H System Variables 35 HALOGAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies a gap to be displayed where an object is hidden by another object. The value is specified as a percent of one unit and is independent of the zoom level. A haloed line is shortened at the point where it is hidden when HIDE or the Hidden option of SHADEMODE are used.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On Reports whether object handles can be accessed by applications. Because handles can no longer be turned off, has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts. HELPPREFIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 842 Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Sets the file path for the Help system.
Hides can be calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by using double precision, but this setting also uses more memory and can affect performance, especially when hiding solids. 0 Single precision; uses less memory 1 Double precision; uses more memory The HIDEPRECISION setting can also be set in the Hidden Line Settings dialog box, Hide Precision area.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. 0 Turns off object selection highlighting 1 Turns on object selection highlighting HPANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.
HPASSOC Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard color books, guides, or sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" HPBOUND Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. 0 Creates a region 1 Creates a polyline A polyline or region object is created only if the HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable is turned on.
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. 0 Does not create boundary objects 1 Creates boundary objects according to the HPBOUND system variable HPCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets a default color for new hatches. Valid values include the following: ■ “.
HPDLGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box.
Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines. 0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling 1 Turns on hatch pattern doubling HPDRAWORDER Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. Controls whether hatch and fill objects are displayed in front or behind all other objects, or in front or behind their associated boundaries. 0 None.
HPGAPTOL Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the area, with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary.
HPISLANDDETECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. 0 Normal. Hatches islands within islands. 1 Outer. Hatches only areas outside of islands. 2 Ignore. Hatches everything within the boundaries. An island is an enclosed area within the area to be hatched.
HPLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. Values other than the “.” (use current) value override the current layer (CELAYER).
HPMAXLINES Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1000000 Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. Valid values are from 100 to10,000,000. HPNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: ANSI31 (imperial) or ANGLE (metric) Sets the default hatch pattern name. Valid names can contain up to 34 characters without spaces.
HPOBJWARNING Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10000 Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. The maximum value can vary, but is significantly larger than 100000000 (one hundred million). HPORIGIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Hatch Origin Point Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled. If the specified duration is reached, and the preview is not complete, the preview is cancelled, but the command remains active. The duration is measured in seconds. Valid values range from 1 to 300.
HPSEPARATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. 0 A single hatch object is created 1 Separate hatch objects are created HPSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.
HPTRANSPARENCY Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Valid values include “use current” (or “.”), ByLayer, ByBlock, and integer values from 0 to 90. The higher the value, the more transparent the hatch. Values other than “use current” or “.” override the current transparency (CETRANSPARENCY on page 1410).
I System Variables 36 IMAGEFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. The FRAME system variable overrides the IMAGEFRAME setting. Use the IMAGEFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the image frame settings. 0 The image frame is not diplayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection.
IMAGEHLT Quick Reference See also: ■ Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted. 0 Highlights only the raster image frame 1 Highlights the entire raster image INDEXCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files.
2 Spatial index is created 3 Layer and spatial indexes are created INETLOCATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Get Started with Internet Access Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: http://www.autodesk.com/acltuser Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web dialog box.
and Down Arrow keys at the Command prompt, or at an input prompt. 2 History of recent input for the current command is displayed in the shortcut menu under Recent Input. 4 History of recent input for all commands in the current session is displayed in the shortcut menu under Recent Input. 8 Markers for recent input of point locations are displayed. Use the arrow keys at the Command prompt for specifying a point location.
Initial value: "" Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. The name must conform to symbol naming conventions. Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no default. INSUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 4 (metric) Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
2 Feet 3 Miles 4 Millimeters 5 Centimeters 6 Meters 7 Kilometers 8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INSUNITSDEFSOURCE | 1555
INSUNITSDEFTARGET Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INTELLIGENTUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Controls the graphics refresh rate. The default value is 20 frames per second. If you encounter problems related to graphics generation or timing, turn off the variable by setting it to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE works by suppressing the graphics update until the timer expires.
Controls the color of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. Value 0 designates entity color ByBlock, value 256 designates entity color ByLayer, and value 257 designates entity color ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. An intersection polyline is what displays as the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces when the HIDE command is used or the SHADEMODE command is set to Hidden.
ISAVEBAK Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a backup file (BAK). In the operating system, copying the file data to create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major portion of the incremental save time.
full saves. When the estimate exceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save. This resets the wasted space estimate to 0. If ISAVEPERCENT is set to 0, every save is a full save. ISOLINES Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Solids Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 Specifies the number of contour lines displayed on the curved surfaces of 3D solids. Valid settings range from 0 to 2047.
L System Variables 37 LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space. LASTPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Entry Type: 3D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space. You can reference the last point specified by entering the @ symbol at a point prompt.
This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables. LAYEREVAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVALCTL on page 1564 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 1566 Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs.
LAYEREVALCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVAL on page 1563 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 1566 Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. This system variable also affects whether the new layer notification is displayed or not.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Deletes excessive layer filters to improve performance. When a drawing has 100 or more layer filters, and the number of layer filters exceeds the number of layers, LAYERFILTERALERT provides a method for deleting layer filters to improve performance.
LAYERNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVAL on page 1563 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 1566 Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. 0 Off 1 Plot 2 Open 4 Load/Reload/Attach for xrefs 8 Restore layer state 16 Save 32 Insert NOTE LAYEREVALCTL overrides the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on).
LAYLOCKFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Fades the objects on locked layers to contrast them with objects on unlocked layers and reduces the visual complexity of a drawing. Objects on locked layers are still visible for reference and for object snapping. The range for controlling the fading for objects on locked layers is from -90 to 90.
LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Work on a Named Layout Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether a viewport is created automatically on each new layout added to a drawing. 0 Newly created layouts do not include any viewports. 1 A single layout viewport is created with each new layout. LIMCHECK Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the creation of objects outside the grid limits.
LIMMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 12.0000,9.0000 (imperial) or 420.0000,297.0000 (metric) Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as world coordinates. LIMMAX is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed. LIMMIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.
LOCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Search Paths and File Locations ■ Organize Program and Support Files (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies by country/region Displays a code that indicates the current locale. This code appears as a three-letter abbreviation returned by the Windows GetLocaleInfo function using the LOCALE_SABBREVLANGNAME constant.
LOCKUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as DesignCenter and the Properties palette. Locked toolbars and windows can still be opened and closed and items can be added and deleted. To unlock them temporarily, hold down Ctrl. A lock icon in the status bar tray indicates whether toolbars and windows are locked. Right-click the icon to display locking options.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file. 0 Log file is not maintained 1 Log file is maintained LOGFILENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. The initial value varies depending on the name of the current drawing and the installation folder.
Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session. You can also specify the path by using the OPTIONS command. The initial value is based on the installation folder. LONGITUDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -122.3940 Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. The default is the longitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -180 to +180.
The linetype scale factor cannot equal zero. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. LUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Unit Format Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets linear units.
However, the internal precision of distance, area, and volume values, and linear coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. LUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE on page 361). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8. LWDEFAULT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Lineweights Type: Enum Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Sets the value for the default lineweight.
This setting is controlled separately for model space and for all paper space layouts. OFF Lineweights are not displayed ON Lineweights are displayed LWUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lineweights Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
M System Variables 38 MAXACTVP Quick Reference See also: ■ Turn Layout Viewports On or Off Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 64 Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. MAXACTVP has no effect on the number of viewports that are plotted.
Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. If the total number of items exceeds this value, no items are sorted. The value of MAXSORT is an integer between 0 and 32767. MAXTOUCHES Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Identifies the number of touch points supported by connected digitizers.
MEASUREINIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Starting a New Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies by country/region Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and linetype files are used. The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch.
Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files. 0 Imperial; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ANSIHatch and ANSILinetype registry settings 1 Metric; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ISOHatch and ISOLinetype registry settings MENUBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Access the Classic Menu Bar Controls the display of the menu bar.
The value is the sum of the following: 1 Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu item toggles echoing) 2 Suppresses display of system prompts during menu 4 Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing 8 Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for DIESEL macros MIRRHATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how MIRROR reflects text. 0 Retains text direction 1 Mirrors the text MLEADERSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Leaders Using Grips Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Use DIMSCALE to scale leader objects created with the LEADER command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
MODEMACRO Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the MODEMACRO System Variable Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays a text string on the status line, such as the name of the current drawing, time/date stamp, or special modes. Use MODEMACRO to display a string of text, or use special text strings written in the DIESEL macro language to have the macro evaluated from time to time and base the status line on user-selected conditions.
MSMSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Using Markups for Design Review (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Markup Set Manager is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open MSOLESCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the size of an OLE object with text that is pasted into model space. MSOLESCALE controls only the initial size.
MTEXTCOLUMN Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets the default column setting for an mtext object. 0 No column. 1 Dynamic columns with auto height. 2 Dynamic column with manual height. MTEXTED Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "Internal" Sets the application for editing multiline text objects.
MTEXTFIXED Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor. If MTEXTED is set to “Internal”, multiline text is displayed in the In-Place Text Editor, and the setting of MTEXTFIXED has the following results: 0 or 1 Displays the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it at the size, position, and rotation of the multiline text object in the drawing.
Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. 0 The Text Formatting toolbar is never displayed. 1 The Text Formatting toolbar is displayed upon selection of an MTEXT object. 2 The Text Formatting toolbar does not display when the ribbon is on. MTJIGSTRING Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "abc" Sets the content of the sample text displayed at the cursor location when the MTEXT command is started.
Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the My Documents folder for the user currently logged on.
N System Variables 39 NAVBARDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Navigation Bar Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports.
1590
O System Variables 40 OBJECTISOLATIONMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. OJBECTISOLATIONMODE controls whether objects that are hidden using the ISOLATEOBJECTS on page 629 or HIDEOBJECTS on page 586 command remain hidden after saving and reopening the drawing.
OBSCUREDCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 257 Specifies the color of obscured lines. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI). An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype and is visible only when the HIDE or SHADEMODE commands are used.
An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype and is visible only when the HIDE or SHADEMODE commands are used. Obscured linetypes are independent of zoom level, unlike regular linetypes.
OFFSETDIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: -1.0000 Sets the default offset distance. <0 Offsets an object through a specified point 0 Sets the default offset distance OFFSETGAPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines are offset. 0 Extends line segments to their projected intersections.
responding vertex on the original object is equal to the offset distance. OLEFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit OLE Objects in Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls whether a frame is displayed and plotted on all OLE objects in the drawing. The frame on an OLE object must be displayed in order for grips to be visible.
Controls the display and plotting of OLE objects. 0 All OLE objects are visible and plot 1 OLE objects are visible and plot in paper space only 2 OLE objects are visible and plot in model space only 3 No OLE objects are visible or plot OLEQUALITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects.
OLESTARTUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. Loading the OLE source application may improve the plot quality.
1 Work can begin on the visible portions of a drawing before it is fully open OPMSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the Properties palette is open, closed, or hidden.
When ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only horizontally or vertically relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle 0 Turns off Ortho mode 1 Turns on Ortho mode OSMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Snaps Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4133 Sets running object snaps The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 NONe 1 ENDpoint 2 MIDpoint 4 CENter 8 NODe 16 QUAdrant 32 INTersection 64 INSertion 128 PERpendicula
512 NEArest 1024 Clears all object snaps 2048 APParent Intersection 4096 EXTension 8192 PARallel To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps.
OSNAPNODELEGACY Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects. The number and location of nodes on a multiline text object snap depends on the vertical and horizontal justification of the multiline text object.
1602
P System Variables 41 PALETTEOPAQUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Transparency Dialog Box on page 888 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. When transparency is available and turned on, you can use the Transparency option on the shortcut menu to set a different degree of transparency for the current palette or for all palettes. When transparency is unavailable or turned off, all palettes are opaque.
2 Transparency is turned off and is not supported by the hardware and/or operating system 3 Transparency is turned on, but is not supported by the hardware and/or operating system Available settings depend whether hardware acceleration is enabled. When hardware acceleration is enabled, setting 2 and 3 are available; when disabled, setting 0 and 1 are available.
PDFFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether the PDF underlay frame is visible. The FRAME system variable overrides the PDFFRAME setting. Use the PDFFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the PDF frame settings. 0 The PDF underlay frame is not displayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. 1 Displays and plots the PDF underlay frame.
The UOSNAP system variable overrides the PDFOSNAP setting. 0 Object snapping is disabled for geometry in all PDF underlay attachments in the drawing 1 Object snapping is enabled for geometry in all PDF underlay attachments in the drawing PDMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Divide an Object into Equal Segments Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how point objects are displayed. For information about values to enter, see the POINT on page 1009 command.
<0 Specifies a percentage of the viewport size PEDITACCEPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT. The prompt is followed by “Do you want it to turn into one?” Entering y converts the selected object to a polyline. When the prompt is suppressed, the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
1 Creates a polyline representation of an ellipse PERIMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. PERSPECTIVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view.
PERSPECTIVECLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5.0000 Determines the location of eyepoint clipping. The value determines where the eye point clipping occurs as a percentage. Values can range between 0.01 and 10.0. If you select a small value, the z-values of objects will be compressed at the target view and beyond. If you select a value such as 0.5%, the clipping will appear very close to the eyepoint of the view.
1 Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. To remove objects from the set, press SHIFT while selecting. 2 Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. To remove objects from the set, press SHIFT while selecting. Keeps objects selected after the SELECT on page 1107 command ends.
PICKBOX Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects Individually Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. NOTE When PICKBOX is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available. PICKDRAG Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Multiple Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the method of drawing a selection window. 0 Create a selection window using two points.
PICKFIRST Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
3 Group selection and associative hatch selection PLATFORM Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates which platform is in use. PLINECONVERTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Splines Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
PLINEGEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
1 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines 2 Polylines in AutoCAD Release 14 or older drawings are converted when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines For more information on the two formats, see the CONVERT command. PLINETYPE also controls the polyline type created with the following commands: BOUNDARY (when object type is set to Polyline), DONUT, PEDIT (when selecting a line or arc), and POLYGON.
Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. 0 Sets the plot offset relative to the printable area. 1 Sets the plot offset relative to the edge of the paper PLOTROTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Select a Printer or Plotter Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the orientation of plots.
PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Object Properties Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls whether object transparency is plotted. 0 Does not plot object transparency 1 Uses the setting specified in the Page Setup or the Plot dialog boxes 2 Plots object transparency Setting the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE system variable to 0 or 2 overrides the Plot Transparency option in the Page Setup or the Plot dialog boxes.
Controls the number of points displayed at once for all point clouds in the drawing view. The system variable value is a percentage of 1,500,000, which is the maximum number of points that can exist in a drawing, regardless of the number of point clouds attached to a single drawing. For example, if the system variable is set to 1, a maximum of 15,000 points is displayed at one time, even if there are multiple point clouds displayed on the screen.
POLARANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 90 Sets the polar angle increment. Values are 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5. POLARDIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap increment when the SNAPTYPE is set to 1 (PolarSnap).
Initial value: 0 Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking.
The range is 3 to 1024. PREVIEWEFFECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.
PREVIEWFILTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending. 0 True 3D mode (no projection) 1 Project to the XY plane of the current UCS 2 Project to the current view plane PROPOBJLIMIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 25000 Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the Properties and Quick Properties palettes. The valid range is 0 - 32767.
Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in the drawing. 0 Does not save image with the drawing; a bounding box is displayed instead 1 Saves image with the drawing PROXYNOTICE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays a notice when a proxy is created. A proxy is created when you open a drawing containing custom objects created by an application that is not present.
Initial value: 1 Controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing. 0 Proxy objects are not displayed 1 Graphic images are displayed for all proxy objects 2 Only the bounding box is displayed for all proxy objects PROXYWEBSEARCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies how the program checks for object enablers. Object enablers allow you to display and use custom objects.
PSLTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports. 0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are based on the drawing units of the space (model or paper) in which the objects were created. Scaled by the global LTSCALE factor. 1 Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-Dependent or Named Plot Style mode.
PUBLISHALLSHEETS Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Specifies whether to load the contents of the active document or of all open documents in the Publish dialog box.
Publishing sheets as a single job requires a plot driver that supports the multi-sheet plotting or printing option. 0 A published sheet set is processed one sheet at a time. Separate PLT files are created for each sheet. If the sheet set is published, the sheets might be interleaved with other plot jobs. 1 A published sheet set is processed as a single job. A multisheet PLT file is created. If the sheet set is published, it is never interleaved with other plot jobs.
PUCSBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space only.
Q System Variables 42 QCSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the location for the Quick Properties palette. 0 The Quick Properties palette is displayed relative to the location of the cursor 1 The Quick Properties palette is displayed in a fixed location that is independent of the cursor QPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: -1 Controls whether the Quick Properties palette is displayed when objects are selected.
QTEXTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how text is displayed. 0 Turns off Quick Text mode; displays characters 1 Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in place of text QVDRAWINGPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default display state of preview images of drawings.
QVLAYOUTPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default display state of preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing.
R System Variables 43 RASTERDPI Quick Reference See also: ■ Plot to Raster File Formats Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 300 Controls paper size and plot scaling when changing from dimensional to dimensionless output devices, or vice versa. Converts millimeters or inches to pixels, or vice versa. Accepts an integer between 100 and 32,767 as a valid value.
Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum percentage of available virtual memory that is allowed for plotting a raster image. RASTERPREVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
RECOVERAUTO Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of recovery notifications before or after opening a damaged drawing file. 0 Displays a task dialog to recover damaged files while opening a drawing that needs recovery. The task dialog interrupts any running scripts. 1 Automatically recovers the damaged files, opens the drawing, and displays a task dialog with the information of the recovered files.
Controls whether drawing recovery information is recorded after a system failure.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing. 0 Prevents automatic regeneration for commands such as DRAWORDER 1 Allows automatic regeneration for certain commands REMEMBERFOLDERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the default path displayed in standard file selection dialog boxes. 0 Restores the behavior of AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases.
REPORTERROR Quick Reference See also: ■ Recover from a System Failure Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether an error report can be sent to Autodesk if the program closes unexpectedly. Error reports help Autodesk diagnose problems with the software. 0 The Error Report message is not displayed, and no report can be sent to Autodesk. 1 The Error Report message is displayed, and an error report can be sent to Autodesk.
Loading the contents of all ribbon tabs in a workspace into memory significantly improves the speed in which ribbon tabs display when you click on them. The memory used is no more than if you opened each tab in the workspace individually. 0 Loads the contents of ribbon tabs into memory only when needed. 1 Loads the contents of ribbon tabs into memory during idle processor time.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Organize the Ribbon Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2500 Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the ribbon property controls or a contextual tab. The valid range is 0 to 32767. When set to 0, the limit is turned off. If the limit is exceeded, the ribbon property controls and panels will be grayed out.
The valid range is from 0 to 500. When set to 0, the ribbon will always size itself to the height of the selected tab. When set to any value between 1 to 500, the ribbon will always be that number of pixels high. RIBBONICONRESIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Organize the Ribbon ■ Create Custom Images for Commands Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether to resize icons on the ribbon to standard sizes.
Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed. 0 The pickfirst selection set does not remain selected after a command is executed from a ribbon contextual tab. NOTE There may be exceptions for some commands. 1 The pickfirst selection set remains selected after a command is executed from a ribbon contextual tab.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. If you are working on a network that supports roaming, when you customize files that are in your roaming profile they are available to you regardless of which machine you are currently using. These files are stored in the product folder under the Application Data folder; for example, "c:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data\productname\versio
ROLLOVERTIPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of rollover tooltips when the cursor hovers over an object. The content in tooltips can be customized in the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor.
S System Variables 44 SAVEFIDELITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing ■ Save with Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Saved without visual fidelity. 1 Annotation objects assigned annotative scales are saved to separate layers for each scale used.
SAVEFILE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. You can also change the path in the Options dialog box.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. SAVETIME Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. 0 Turns off automatic saving. >0 Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the nonzero integer automatically The value of SAVETIME is an integer between 0 and 600.
(Read-only) Type: 2D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y). SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Annotative Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected. 0 Off 1 On The dimming intensity is controlled by the XFADECTL system variable.
Selection areas are created by the Window, Crossing, WPolygon, and CPolygon options of SELECT on page 1107. 0 Off 1 On SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. The valid range is 0 to 100. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value of 100 makes the area opaque.
Turns selection cycling on and off. 0 Off 1 On (the list dialog does not display) 2 On (the list dialog displays the selected objects that you can cycle through) SELECTIONPREVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls the display of selection previewing. Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked.
SELECTSIMILARMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects by Properties Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 130 Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected with SELECTSIMILAR. The default value is 130. Objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the same layer, and, for referenced objects, have the same name.
SETBYLAYERMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 255 Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the shading of edges. 0 Faces shaded, edges not highlighted 1 Faces shaded, edges drawn in background color 2 Faces not filled, edges in object color 3 Faces in object color, edges in background color SHADEDIF Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light.
Initial value: 11 Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus. 1 Enables Default mode shortcut menus. 2 Enables Edit mode shortcut menus. 4 Enables Command mode shortcut menus whenever a command is active.
The value is expressed in milliseconds, and the valid range is 100 to 10,000. If the right button is held down for the same or longer duration than the value of this system variable, a shortcut menu is displayed. If the right button is held down for a shorter duration, the result is the same as if you press the Enter or Return key. NOTE The SHORTCUTMENU on page 1655 system variable must be set to a value greater than 15 for this system variable to take effect.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the Page Setup Manager is displayed when a new layout is created. 0 Do not display the Page Setup Manager when a new layout is created 1 Display the Page setup Manager when a new layout is created SIGWARN Quick Reference See also: ■ View Digital Signature Details Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened.
SKETCHINC Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1000 (imperial) or 1.0000 (metric) Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command. SKPOLY Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines.
SKTOLERANCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5 Determines how closely the spline fits to the freehand sketch. Valid values are between 0 and 1. SNAPANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. When SNAPANG is set to a value other than 0, the lined grid will not display.
Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. SNAPISOPAIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Isometric Grid and Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
Turns the Snap mode on and off. 0 Snap off 1 Snap on for the current viewport SNAPSTYL Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the snap style for the current viewport. 0 Standard (rectangular snap) 1 Isometric snap SNAPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the type of snap for the current viewport. 0 Grid, or standard snap.
1 PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking. SNAPUNIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10.0000,10.0000 (metric) Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. If SNAPSTYL is set to 1, the X value of SNAPUNIT is adjusted automatically to accommodate the isometric snap.
1 Sorts for object selection 2 Sorts for object snaps 4 Obsolete, has no effect 8 Obsolete, has no effect 16 Sorts for REGEN commands 32 Sorts for plotting 64 Obsolete, has no effect SPLDEGREE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Stores the last-used degree setting for splines and sets the default degree setting for the SPLINE command when specifying control vertices. Enter a value from 1 to 5.
SPLFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Creating Meshes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display of helixes and smoothed mesh objects. 0 1 ■ Does not display the control polygon for helixes. ■ Displays smoothed mesh objects if they have been smoothed. ■ Does not display the invisible edges of 3D faces or polyface meshes. ■ Displays the control polygon for helixes. ■ Displays unsmoothed mesh objects, even if they have been smoothed.
and then a fit-type curve is applied to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate. SPLINETYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
2 Uniform distance NOTE SPLKNOTS always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD LT starts. SPLMETHOD Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Splines Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores whether the default method used for the SPLINE command is fit points or control vertices. 0 Create splines using fit points 1 Create splines using control vertices NOTE SPLMETHOD always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD LT starts.
Controls whether closed splines and NURBS surfaces are generated with periodic properties to maintain the smoothest continuity at the closure point or seam. 0 Creates closed splines and NURBS surfaces with the method used in AutoCAD LT 2011 and earlier releases. 1 Creates periodic closed splines and closed NURBS surfaces, for the smoothest (C2) continuity.
Controls whether the sheet set associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened. 0 Does not open a drawing's sheet set with the drawing 1 Opens a drawing's sheet set with the drawing SSMAUTOOPEN and SSLOCATE must both be set to 1 to open a sheet set automatically in the Sheet Set Manager.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 60 Controls the time interval between automatic refreshes of the status data in a sheet set. The SSMPOLLTIME timer sets the time in seconds between automatic refreshes of the status data of sheets in a sheet set. Valid values are 20-600. The SSMSHEETSTATUS system variable must be set to 2 for the timer to operate.
SSMSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Sheet Set (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open STARTUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Starting a New Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls what displays when the application is started, or when a new drawing is opened.
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, file dialog boxes are not displayed. 0 Displays the Select Template dialog box, or uses a default drawing template file set in the Options dialog box, on the Files tab. 1 Starts without opening a drawing template file, and displays the Startup or the Create New Drawing dialog box. 2 Starts without opening a drawing template file. If available in the application a custom dialog box is displayed.
SYSCODEPAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Text Fonts for International Work (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates the system code page, which is determined by the operating system. To change the code page, see Help for your operating system.
1674
T System Variables 45 TABLEINDICATOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of row numbers and column letters when the In-Place Text Editor is open for editing a table cell.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Table toolbar. 0 The Table toolbar is never displayed. 1 The Table toolbar is displayed upon selection of a table cell. 2 The Table toolbar is not displayed when the ribbon is turned on. TABMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Digitizing Tablets Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the use of the tablet. For more information on using and configuring a tablet, see the TABLET command.
TARGET Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target point for the current viewport. TBSHOWSHORTCUTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Toolbars Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: yes Specifies whether shortcuts that use the Ctrl and Alt keys are displayed in the tooltips on toolbars.
TDCREATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. TDINDWG Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. The format is: .
TDUCREATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created. TDUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date of the last update/save.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the user-elapsed timer. TDUUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save. TEMPOVERRIDES Quick Reference See also: ■ Override Object Snap Settings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Turns temporary override keys on and off.
TEXTED Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Single-Line Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. 0 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. 1 Displays the Edit Text dialog box when editing single-line text. 2 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. Repeats the command automatically.
TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Share Drawing Files Internationally Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Provides Unicode options for log files. 0 ANSI format 1 UTF-8 (Unicode) 2 UTF-16LE (Unicode) 3 UTF-16BE (Unicode) TEXTQLTY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use TrueType Fonts Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
Sets the resolution of TrueType fonts while plotting. Use integer values from 0 to 100. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. TEXTSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Text Height Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.2000 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSIZE has no effect if the current text style has a fixed height.
THICKNESS Quick Reference See also: ■ Add 3D Thickness to Objects Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the current 3D thickness. TILEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -8000 Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing. The values in the table are expressed as hours and minutes away from Greenwich Mean Time. The geographic location you set also sets the time zone. If the time zone is not accurate, you can correct it in the Geographic Location dialog box or set the TIMEZONE system variable.
-4000 Atlantic Time (Canada) -4001 Caracas, La Paz -4002 Santiago -3300 Newfoundland -3000 Brasilia -3001 Buenos Aires, Georgetown -3002 Greenland -2000 Mid-Atlantic -1000 Azores -1001 Cape Verde Is.
+2004 Helsinki, Kyiv, Sofia, Talinn, Vilnius +2005 Jerusalem +3000 Moscow, St.
+8002 Taipei +8003 Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar +8004 Perth +9000 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo +9001 Seoul +9002 Yakutsk +9300 Adelaide +9301 Darwin +10000 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney +10001 Guam, Port Moresby +10002 Brisbane +10003 Hobart +10004 Vladivostok +11000 Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia +12000 Auckland, Wellington +12001 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is.
TOOLTIPMERGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. The appearance of the merged tooltip is controlled by the settings in the Tooltip Appearance dialog box. 0 Off 1 On TOOLTIPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements.
TOOLTIPSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Other Tool Locations Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the display size for drafting tooltips, and for automatic completion text at the Command prompt. Valid range is -3 to 6. Greater values result in larger drafting tooltips, and larger automatic completion text at the Command prompt. Negative values represent smaller sizes than the default.
TPSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Tool Palettes (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open TRACEWID Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0500 (imperial) or 1.0000 (metric) Sets the default trace width. Obsolete The TRACE command and TRACEWID system variable have been removed from the product.
TRACKPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. 0 Object transparency is not displayed 1 Object transparency is displayed TRAYICONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar.
1 Displays notifications TRAYTIMEOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed. Valid values are 0 to 10. TREEDEPTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3020 Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into branches.
>0 Turns on spatial indexing. An integer of up to five digits is valid. The first three digits refer to model space, and the remaining two digits refer to paper space. <0 Treats model space objects as 2D (Z coordinates are ignored), as is always the case with paper space objects. Such a setting is appropriate for 2D drawings and makes more efficient use of memory without loss of performance NOTE You cannot use TREEDEPTH transparently.
The program might occasionally run into the limit you set with TREEMAX. Follow the resulting prompt instructions. Your ability to increase TREEMAX depends on your computer's available memory. TRIMMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed.
TSPACETYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text. At Least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest characters in a line. Exactly uses the specified line spacing, regardless of individual character sizes.
TSTACKSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Valid values are from 25 to 125.
U System Variables 46 UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING Quick Reference See also: ■ The UCS Icon ■ Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. 0 Off. The UCS icon is not displayed when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. 1 On. The UCS icon is displayed when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. NOTE The UCSICON on page 1271 command must also be set to ON to display the UCS icon.
UCSAXISANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 90 Stores the default angle when rotating the UCS around one of its axes using the X, Y, or Z option of the UCS command. Its value must be entered as an angle in degrees (valid values are: 5, 10, 15, 18, 22.5, 30, 45, 90, 180).
UCSFOLLOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. The UCSFOLLOW setting is saved separately for each viewport. If UCSFOLLOW is on for a particular viewport, a plan view is generated in that viewport whenever you change coordinate systems. Once the new UCS has been established, you can use PLAN, VIEW, or VPOINT to change the view of the drawing.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport or layout. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
UCSORG Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. This value is always stored as a world coordinate.
UCSSELECTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the UCS icon can be selected and manipulated with grips. 0 The UCS icon is not selectable. 1 The UCS icon is selectable. UCSVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether the current UCS is saved with a named view.
UCSXDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific. UCSYDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,1.0000,0.
UNDOCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 53 Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO command.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. The Mark and Back options are not available if a group is currently active. UNITMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Units and Unit Formats Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display format for units. By default, the format for displaying measured values differs slightly from the format used for entering them.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays that are attached to the drawing. UOSNAP overrides the DWFOSNAP, PDFOSNAP, and DGNOSNAP settings. Conversely, you can override the UOSNAP setting for DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays by issuing the necessary DWFOSNAP, PDFOSNAP, or DGNOSNAP system variables.
4 Updates previews for layouts 8 Updates previews when layouts or views are created, modified, or restored 16 Updates previews when the drawing is saved USERI1-5 Quick Reference See also: ■ DIESEL Expressions in Macros Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Provides storage and retrieval of integer values. There are five system variables: USERI1, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, and USERI5.
USERR1-5 Quick Reference See also: ■ DIESEL Expressions in Macros Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Provides storage and retrieval of real numbers. There are five system variables: USERR1, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, and USERR5.
V System Variables 47 VERSION Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the AutoCAD LT version.
Stores the center of view in the current viewport. Expressed as a UCS coordinate. VIEWDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Change to a View of the XY Plane (Read-only) Type: 3D-vector Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,1.0000 Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. This describes the camera point as a 3D offset from the target point.
2 Front clipping on 4 Back clipping on. 8 UCS Follow mode on. 16 Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance (FRONTZ) determines the front clipping plane. If off, FRONTZ is ignored, and the front clipping plane is set to pass through the camera point (vectors behind the camera are not displayed). This flag is ignored if the front-clipping bit (2) is off.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS. VISRETAIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Controls visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot styles. 0 The layer table, as stored in the reference drawing (xref), takes precedence.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport.
VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not. The maximized viewport state is canceled if you start the PLOT command.
NOTE After rotating a viewport, VPROTATEASSOC is set to 0 for a new viewport created in the same layout. VSMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the upper-right corner of the current viewport's virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
VTDURATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 750 Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. The valid range is 0 to 5000. VTENABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls when smooth view transitions are used. Smooth view transitions can be on or off for panning and zooming, for changes of view angle, or for scripts. The valid range is 0 to 7.
Setting For pan/zoom For rotation For scripts 4 Off Off On 5 On Off On 6 Off On On 7 On On On VTFPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used. The valid range is 1 to 30.
1720
W System Variables 48 WHIPARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Curved Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection. The valid range is 1 to 255. SELECTIONAREA on page 1650 must be on. WMFBKGND Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Referenced Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Off Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format.
WMFFOREGND Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Referenced Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Off Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. The objects may be inserted using any of the following methods: ■ Output to a Windows metafile using WMFOUT ■ Copied to the Clipboard and pasted as a Windows metafile ■ Dragged as a Windows metafile WMFFOREGND applies only when WMFBKGND is set to Off.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether to display the name of the current workspace in the status bar. 0 Hides the workspace name 1 Displays the workspace name WORLDUCS Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the UCS is the same as the WCS.
Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS. 0 UCS remains unchanged 1 UCS changes to the WCS for the duration of the command; the command input is relative to the current UCS WSAUTOSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces ■ Workspace Settings Dialog Box on page 1341 Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Saves changes you made to a workspace when you switch to another work space.
Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Returns the current workspace name at the Command prompt and sets a workspace to current.
X System Variables 49 XCLIPFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the XCLIPFRAME setting.Use the XCLIPFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the clipped xref frame settings 0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted.
XDWGFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 70 Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. The valid XDWGFADECTL system variable value is between -90 and 90. When XDWGFADECTL is set to a negative value, the Xref Fading feature is not turned on, but the setting is stored. 0 DWG xref objects are not faded. >0 When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent.
Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. 0 Can't use in-place reference editing 1 Can use in-place reference editing XFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the amount of fading within a reference being edited in place. This setting affects only the objects that are not being edited in the reference. Valid values are from 0 to 90.
Initial value: 2 Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. 0 Turns off demand-loading; the entire drawing is loaded. 1 Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are kept open and locked. 2 Turns on demand-loading.
XREFCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Track External Reference Operations (Log File) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created. 0 Does not write log files 1 Writes log files XREFNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. 0 Disables xref notification 1 Enables xref notification.
2 Enables xref notification and balloon messages. Displays the xref icon as in 1 above. Also displays balloon messages in the same area when xrefs are modified. The number of minutes between checking for modified xrefs is controlled by the environment variable XNOTIFYTIME. XREFTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference.
Z System Variables 50 ZOOMFACTOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Pointing Device Buttons Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 60 Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward. Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as a valid value. The higher the number, the more the change.
Initial value: 0 Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. 0 Moves wheel forward zooms in; moving wheel backwards zooms out. 1 Move wheel forward zooms out; moving wheel backwards zooms in.
Utilities 51 Attach Digital Signatures Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Menu: Start menu (Windows) ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD LT ➤ Attach Digital Signatures The Attach Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed. Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Digital Signatures Selects the files for attachment of digital signatures.
Files to Be Signed Lists the names of the files to be signed, the folder in which each file resides, and the current status of the file. Add Files Opens the Select File dialog box, where you select the files for digital signature. Search Folders Opens the Search Folders dialog box, where you can search for files in the folder you specify. Remove Removes selected files from the Files to Be Signed list. Clear List Removes all files from the Files to Be Signed list.
Time Service Status Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted Time Server or Could Not Contact Time Server) of the time service. Comment Provides a place to include information relevant to the digital signature or to the files you are signing. Sign Files Attaches a digital signature to every file listed in this dialog box. Search Folders Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Digital Signatures Searches for folders that contain files you want to digitally sign.
SLIDELIB Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and View Slide Libraries Compiles slide files listed in an ASCII file into a slide library file. You can construct slide library (SLB) files from slide (SLD) files by using the SLIDELIB utility program supplied in the main program folder. The following operating system command prompt syntax constructs a slide library: slidelib library [ < slidelist ] where library specifies the slide library file (extension .slb) into which the slide files (extension .
WARNING Do not delete your original slides. SLIDELIB has no provision for updating a slide library once it is created. If you want to add or delete a slide, update the slidelist file and re-create the library with SLIDELIB. All the original slides must be present in order to do this.
1740
Index 3DCONFIG command about 3 Performance Tuner Log 5 Performance Tuning dialog box 3Dconnexion Settings dialog box 3DPOLY command 7 3DSELECTIONMODE system variable 1377 4 A ABOUT command 9 Actions tab (Block Authoring Palettes window) 131 ADCCLOSE command 10 ADCENTER command about DesignCenter window 11 Search dialog box 15 ADCNAVIGATE command 18 ADCSTATE system variable 1380 Add Angle Value dialog box 1020 Add Custom Property dialog box 458, 1146 Add Distance Value dialog box 1020 Add Page Setup dialog
ARRAYPOLAR command 57 ARRAYRECT command 60 ARRAYTYPE system variable 1387 ATTACH command 63 Attach DGN Underlay dialog box 282 Attach Digital Signatures dialog box 1735 Attach Digital Signatures utility 1735 Attach DWF Underlay dialog box 435 Attach External Reference dialog box 1344 Attach Image dialog box 613 Attach PDF Underlay dialog box 934 Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 1048 ATTACHURL command 66 ATTDEF command 67 ATTDIA system variable 1387 ATTEDIT command 75 ATTEXT command 81 ATTIPE syst
BHATCH command 139 Bind Xrefs/DGN Underlays dialog box 1359 BLEND command 139 BLIPMODE command 140 BLIPMODE system variable 1399 Block Attribute Manager about 106 Block Attribute Settings dialog box 113 Block Authoring Palettes window 127 BLOCK command 145 Block Definition dialog box 146 Block Editor about 127 Parameters Manager 921 Block Editor ribbon contextual tab (Block Editor) 122 Block Editor Settings dialog box 136 Block Editor toolbar 128 Block Properties Table dialog box 168 Block Template Options
Change Icon dialog box 822 Change to Layer dialog box 679 Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box 913, 972 Check Spelling dialog box 1163 Check Spelling Settings dialog box 1165 Choose Files to Upload dialog box 1298 CHPROP command 203 CHSPACE command 205 CIRCLE command 206 CIRCLERAD system variable 1413 CLASSICIMAGE command 208 CLASSICKEYS system variable 1413 CLASSICLAYER command 209 CLASSICXREF command 209 CLAYER system variable 1414 CLEANSCREENOFF command 211 CLEANSCREENON command 210 CLEANSC
Create Transmittal dialog box about 471 Files Table tab 472 Files Tree tab 471 CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable 1424 CTAB system variable 1424 CTABLESTYLE system variable 1424 CUI command about 241 Button Editor dialog box 252 Find and Replace dialog box 255 Image Manager dialog box 254 CUIEXPORT command 257 CUIIMPORT command 257 CUILOAD command 258 CUIUNLOAD command 260 Current Plot Style dialog box 988 CURSORSIZE system variable 1425 Custom tab (Drawing Properties dialog box) 457 CUSTOMIZE command 261 Cu
DGN Mapping Setups dialog box 311 Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box 314 New Mapping Setup dialog box 313 DGNMAPPINGPATH system variable 1436 DGNOSNAP system variable 1436 DIASTAT system variable 1437 Dictionaries dialog box 1167 Digital Signature Contents dialog box 1155 Digital Signature tab (Security Options dialog box) 1105 DIGITIZER system variable 1437 DIM and DIM1 commands 320 DIMADEC system variable 1438 DIMALIGNED command 323 DIMALT system variable 1438 DIMALTD system variable 1439 DIMALTF system
DIMSCALE system variable 1465 DIMSD1 system variable 1466 DIMSD2 system variable 1466 DIMSE1 system variable 1467 DIMSE2 system variable 1467 DIMSOXD system variable 1468 DIMSPACE command 361 DIMSTYLE command about 362 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box 396 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 365 Dimension Style Manager 363 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 366 New Dimension Style dialog box 366 Override Dimension Style dialog box 366 DIMSTYLE system variable 1468 DIMTAD system variable 1469 DIMTDEC syst
Substitute DWF Name dialog box 437 DWFCLIP command 441 DWFFORMAT command 442 DWFFRAME system variable 1486 DWFLAYERS command 443 DWFOSNAP system variable 1487 DWG Convert dialog box 444 DWGCHECK system variable 1488 DWGCODEPAGE system variable 1488 DWGCONVERT command about 443 Conversion Setups dialog box 446 DWG Convert dialog box 444 Modify Conversion Setup dialog box 448 New Conversion Setup dialog box 447 DWGNAME system variable 1489 DWGPREFIX system variable 1489 DWGPROPS command about 451 Add Custom P
EXPORTDWF command about 485 Export to DWF/PDF Options palette 486 Export to DWF/PDF ribbon panel 491 Import Precision Preset dialog box 491 New Precision Preset dialog box 491 Page Setup Override dialog box 488 Precision Presets Manager 489 Save as DWF dialog box 485 EXPORTDWFX command about 493 Save as DWFx dialog box 493 EXPORTEPLOTFORMAT system variable 1502 EXPORTLAYOUT command 495 EXPORTMODELSPACE system variable 1502 EXPORTPAGESETUP system variable 1503 EXPORTPAPERSPACE system variable 1503 EXPORTPDF
GEOGRAPHICLOCATION command Coordinate System Already Defined dialog box 531 Define Geographic Location dialog box 530 Geographic Location dialog box 532 Location Already Exists dialog box 531 Location Picker dialog box 535 GEOLATLONGFORMAT system variable 1516 GEOMARKERVISIBILITY system variable 1516 Geometric tab (Constraint Settings dialog box) 227 Geometric Tolerance dialog box 1245 Get Link dialog box 537 GETENV command 536 GETLINK command 537 GFANG system variable 1517 GFCLR1 system variable 1517 GFCLR
HPASSOC system variable 1535 HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR system variable 1536 HPBOUND system variable 1536 HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable 1537 HPCOLOR system variable 1538 HPDLGMODE system variable 1538 HPDOUBLE system variable 1539 HPDRAWORDER system variable 1540 HPGAPTOL system variable 1540 HPINHERIT system variable 1541 HPISLANDDETECTION system variable 1541 HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE system variable 1542 HPLAYER system variable 1542 HPMAXAREAS system variable 1543 HPMAXLINES system variable 1543 HPNAME system variabl
INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable 1557 INTELLIGENTUPDATE system variable 1557 INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable 1558 INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable 1559 ISAVEBAK system variable 1559 ISAVEPERCENT system variable 1560 ISOLATEOBJECTS command 629 ISOLINES system variable 1560 ISOPLANE command 630 J JOIN command 633 JPGOUT command 635 JUSTIFYTEXT command 636 L LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT system variable 1561 LASTANGLE system variable 1562 LASTPOINT system variable 1562 LATITUDE system variable 1563 LAYCUR command
LAYWALK command 693 LEADER command 696 Leader Format tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 752 Leader Line & Arrow tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 1047 Leader Settings dialog box 1045 Leader Structure tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 753 LENGTHEN command 699 LIMCHECK system variable 1569 LIMITS command 701 LIMMAX system variable 1569 LIMMIN system variable 1570 LINE command 703 Lines and Arrows tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 367 LINETYPE command about 705 Linetype Manager 705 Load or Rel
MLEADER command 743 MLEADERALIGN command 745 MLEADERCOLLECT command 746 MLEADEREDIT command 748 MLEADERSCALE system variable 1583 MLEADERSTYLE command about 749 Create New Multileader Style dialog box 757 Modify Multileader Style dialog box 752 Multileader Style Manager 750 MODEL command 758 Model Views tab (Sheet Set Manager) 1127 MODEMACRO system variable 1583 Modify Archive Setup dialog box 35 Modify Conversion Setup dialog box 448 Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box 314 Modify Dimension Style dialog box
New Visibility State dialog box 174 NEWSHEETSET command 812 O Object Selection Filters dialog box 522 Object Snap tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 420 Object Snaps command modifier 1372 OBJECTISOLATIONMODE system variable 1592 OBJECTSCALE command about 813 Add Scales to Object dialog box 815 Annotative Object Scale dialog box 814 OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable 1592 OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable 1594 OFFSET command 817 OFFSETDIST system variable 1594 OFFSETGAPTYPE system variable 1595 OLE Text Size dialog
OSNAP command 894 OSNAPCOORD system variable 1601 OSNAPNODELEGACY system variable 1601 OSOPTIONS system variable 1602 OVERKILL command 895 Override Dimension Style dialog box 366 P Page Setup dialog box 906 Page Setup Manager about 902 Page Setup dialog box 906 Page Setup Override dialog box 488 PAGESETUP command about 901 Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box 913 Import Page Setups dialog box 913 New Page Setup dialog box 904 Page Setup dialog box 906 Page Setup Manager 902 PALETTEOPAQUE syst
PLOT command about 961 Add Page Setup dialog box 971 Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog box 972 Plot dialog box 962 Plot Job Progress dialog box 973 Update PC3 File with New Printer dialog box 973 Plot dialog box 962 Plot Job Progress dialog box 973 Plot Stamp dialog box 979 Plot Style Table Editor about 1187 Form View tab 1190 General tab 1189 Table View tab 1190 Plot Style Table Settings dialog box 879 PLOTOFFSET system variable 1616 PLOTROTMODE system variable 1617 PLOTSTAMP command about 979
PSTYLEMODE system variable 1627 PSTYLEPOLICY system variable 1628 Publish Block Template dialog box 1030 PUBLISH command Block Template Options dialog box 1031 Confirm DWF Password dialog box 1032 DWF Password dialog box 1032 Publish Block Template dialog box 1030 Publish dialog box 1024 Publish Job Progress dialog box 1033 Publish Options dialog box 1028 Publish dialog box 1024 Publish Job Progress dialog box 1033 Publish Options dialog box 1028 Publish Sheets dialog box 1130 Publish to Web wizard 1035 PUB
REGENALL command 1079 REGENMODE system variable 1639 REGION command 1080 REINIT command 1081 Reload Linetypes dialog box 708 REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable 1640 Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box 1134 Rename & Renumber View dialog box 1135 RENAME command 1082 Rename dialog box 1083 Replace tab (Find and Replace dialog box) 255 REPORTERROR system variable 1640 RESETBLOCK command 1085 Resource Drawing Locations dialog box 1146 RESUME command 1085 REVCLOUD command 1086 REVDATE command 1087 REVERSE command 108
SELECT command 1107 Select Layer States dialog box 674 Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box 673 Select Layout as Sheet Template dialog box 1131 Select Linetype dialog box 656 Select Place in Document dialog box 595 Select Plot Style dialog box 989 Select Similar Settings dialog box 1111 Selection Cycling tab (Draft settings dialog box) 428 Selection Modes command modifier 1373 Selection tab (Options dialog box) 869 SELECTIONANNODISPLAY system variable 1650 SELECTIONAREA system variable 1651 SELECT
View Category dialog box 1150 SHEETSETHIDE command 1153 SHORTCUTMENU system variable 1656 SHORTCUTMENUDURATION system variable 1657 SHOWLAYERUSAGE system variable 1657 SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS system variable 1658 SHOWPALETTES command 1153 SIGVALIDATE command about 1153 Digital Signature Contents dialog box 1155 Validate Digital Signatures dialog box 1154 SIGWARN system variable 1659 SKETCH command 1157 SKETCHINC system variable 1659 SKPOLY system variable 1660 SKTOLERANCE system variable 1660 SLIDELIB ut
Table ribbon contextual tab 1204 Table Data tab (Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box) 1139 Table ribbon contextual tab 1204 Table Style dialog box 1212 Table View tab (Plot Style Table Editor) 1190 TABLEDIT command 1211 TABLEEXPORT command 1211 TABLEINDICATOR system variable 1675 TABLESTYLE command about 1212 Additional Format dialog box 1223 Create New Cell Style dialog box 1219 Create New Table Style dialog box 1214 Manage Cell Styles dialog box 1220 Modify Table Style dialog box 1215 New Table Style dialo
TRACKPATH system variable 1692 Transfer tab (Customize User Interface dialog box) 251 Transmittal - Set Password dialog box 479 Transmittal Setups dialog box 473 TRANSPARENCY command 1258 Transparency dialog box 888 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY system variable 1693 Tray Settings dialog box 1259 TRAYICONS system variable 1693 TRAYNOTIFY system variable 1694 TRAYSETTINGS command 1258 TRAYTIMEOUT system variable 1694 Tree View shortcut menu 646 TREEDEPTH system variable 1695 TREEMAX system variable 1696 TRIM command 12
New View dialog box 1304 View of This Drawing tab (Insert Hyperlink dialog box) 593 View Options dialog box 1255 View Properties tab (New View dialog box) 1304 View Transitions dialog box 1327 VIEWCTR system variable 1712 VIEWDIR system variable 1712 VIEWGO command 1307 VIEWMODE system variable 1713 VIEWPLOTDETAILS command about 1308 Plot and Publish Details dialog box 1309 Plot and Publish Status Bar Icon shortcut menu 1310 Viewpoint Presets dialog box 277 Viewports dialog box 1319 VIEWRES command 1311 VIE
XREF command 1359 XREFCTL system variable 1731 XREFNOTIFY system variable 1732 XREFTYPE system variable 1732 Z ZOOM command 1363 ZOOMFACTOR system variable 1733 ZOOMWHEEL system variable 1734 Index | 1765
1766